JP6694418B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine in which the effect display is performed, there is a gaming machine that includes an image display device (main liquid crystal) and a sub image display device (sub liquid crystal), and performs an effect display similar to the image display device and the sub image display device (for example, See Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-117576, A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, when these similar effect displays are performed by either the image display device or the sub-image display device, the display position is different, and the aspect is different. Because it was common, the production was monotonous.

  Therefore, the problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game by changing the mode of production.

(1) A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a first display means (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, a main display 5 or the like) that is harder to recognize than the first display means. Sub liquid crystal 57SH51 etc.), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player , and as a specific effect of displaying the latter stage display after performing the first stage display. , Specific effect executing means capable of executing the first specific effect and the second specific effect, sound output means capable of outputting a sound related to the game (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means. Sound control means (for example, a voice control board 13 or the like) for controlling the sound, and the specific effect executing means displays the notice image as a second-stage display after displaying the first front-stage display in the first specific production. The second special Effect displays a notice image as subsequent display after displaying the second pre-display is capable of displaying common characters between the first pre-display and the second front view, the sound control means, said first 2 A specific sound is output when performing the first-stage display, while the specific sound is not output when performing the first front-stage display, and the first specific effect is executed and the second specific effect. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when is executed .

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the aspect of the effect.

(2) A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a first display unit (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) capable of displaying a game and a second display unit (for example, a main liquid crystal 5) that is harder to recognize than the first display unit (for example, Sub liquid crystal 57SH51 etc.), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player , and as a specific effect of displaying the latter stage display after performing the first stage display. , Specific effect executing means capable of executing the first specific effect and the second specific effect, sound output means capable of outputting a sound related to the game (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means. Sound control means (for example, a voice control board 13 or the like) for controlling the sound, and the specific effect executing means displays the notice image as a second-stage display after displaying the first front-stage display in the first specific production. The second special Effect displays a notice image as subsequent display after displaying the second pre-display is capable of displaying common characters between the first pre-display and the second front view, the sound control means, said first (2) The sound output mode is different between when the first-stage display is performed and when the first-stage display is performed, and the advantageous state is set when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed. Characterized by different controlled ratios .

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the aspect of the effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display control means does not execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect at the same time (for example, with the treasure box 57SH10 displayed on the main liquid crystal 5). The treasure chest 57SH10 displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 may not be executed in one variable display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, "simultaneous" that the first specific effect and the second specific effect are not executed at the same time means that one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect starts from the start time to the end time of the other. No specific effect is executed, for example, the first specific effect and the second specific effect are not executed during one variable display.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display control means executes the specific effect on the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)). After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10 on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the main liquid crystal 5 has the treasure chest 57SH10 opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10. May be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, the player can easily recognize the effect result, and thus the interest can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the specific effect is a notice effect that suggests an effect other than the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. Suggested treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5, treasure box effect that suggests a change in the hold display displayed in the hold display area 57SH52, as shown in FIG. 21-8, decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative pattern displayed on the screen may be a treasure box effect that gives an advance notice of a pseudo-relation effect in which a single change causes a plurality of changes to appear.

  According to the above configuration, variations that are suggested with respect to effects other than the specific effect are increased, so that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame being opened. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern judgment table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data holding area for game control. It is a front view showing the structure of the second special variable winning ball device. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of memory area in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows a part of game control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure showing the production mode of the 1st starting winning a prize effect and the 2nd starting winning a prize effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode during variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode during variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode during the variable display in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the representation mode during the variable display in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the representation mode during the variable display in the modification 2. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process in Modification 3; (A) is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in the modified example 4, and (B) is an explanatory view illustrating a change in display contents of the display monitor in the modified example 4. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 5. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 5. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 6. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 7. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting value conversion processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the conversion method of a setting value to a setting secret value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting value update processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination rate of the background effect (setting value suggestion effect) in the morning. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine including a characteristic portion 48SH. (A) is a figure explaining the display apparatus and display character which display a treasure box, (B) is a figure explaining the execution ratio of treasure box production, (C) is a figure which shows a pre-reading treasure box production content determination table, ( (D) is a figure which shows a SP reach loss treasure box effect content determination table, (E) is a figure which shows an SP reach jackpot treasure box effect content determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the treasure box production decision processing of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation operation | movement of 1st Embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation operation | movement of 1st Embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a time chart of an example of the effect operation of the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production operation of 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of production operation of 2nd Embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a time chart of an example of the effect operation of the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the production operation of the modification of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the production operation of the modification of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the production operation of the modification of the characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the production operation of the modification of the characteristic part 57SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is moved. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset. It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing at which the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controlling the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative design in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative design.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss” is displayed. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is “miss”. The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is “big hit”. Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B. <Higher in order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where a development effect of developing (promoting) to a reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. It should be noted that the notification mode of the title may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is reached. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach production is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of the super reach (also referred to as super reach production) is finished, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), the entire screen of the image display device 5 The title 31AK002 (here, "SP reach A" here) of the super reach A is displayed on the screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here "super reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted with each other, as shown in FIG. 9 (E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here "SP Reach B" is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach ("Super Reach B" in this case) to notify the title of Super Reach B. It After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the titles are In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach is performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title is notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 are continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as in FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the enemy character character 31AK009 is displayed, the character 31AK001 lines 31AK004 are displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. It

(Super reach E)
In the case of the super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of the super reach E (here, the characters “SP reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 face each other is displayed. Executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super-reach reach effect with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, you may make it display an expectation degree suggestion display in at least one part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expectation indication is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or it corresponds to the expectation. The displayed numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is shown, half (corresponding to half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each of the reach effects has been executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The fixed decorative design is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but during the reach effect. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and an effect that the screen is torn is executed. After that, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is notified, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11 (D), the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the developed reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating a failure) is displayed. You may do it. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 displays the black stars indicating the expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and step by step. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which shows an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectations indication indication 31AK021 is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021. A production that fits into one of the white stars of is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more steps. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. In addition, the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing at one time, and it fits into the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are example production operations of title notification and expectation suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 A production that fits in one of the white rhombuses is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) depending on the production mode (state when the reach production is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, an effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters of "SP reach C") is displayed, thereby The reach C title is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 has operated, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary performance)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), the title notice is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or a development effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to a big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, the effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies according to the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  The "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined as either one. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is set in the special mode. Determine the title display color in different proportions. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title announcement depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed by the display mode of the character's dialogue in the reach production of super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, other than super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 16, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialog notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode is changed and the ratio of which effect is changed may be different from that of the speech notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) it is changed may be different. . By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is acted when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title, like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 as the notice effect (for example, the look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“reach with 7”, “use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win / loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the reach mode is set on the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is hit by the bullet. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect has been executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 18L, an image 31AK052 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination is derived. Note that when an operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Note that the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, but the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the variable display screen is returned to the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the title display color is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the determination regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Additional notes regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the state is controlled, and title notification means (for example, effect) that can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The control CPU 120), and the title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). ).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of kinds of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of kinds of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period. May be executable in a common manner (eg, FIG. 9C).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, at a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. Execution is possible, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the suggestive effect execution means has at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) as the suggestive effect. 2 suggestive effects (for example, reach effects of super reach D and super reach E) can be executed, and in the second suggestive effect, the title notifying unit starts the second suggestive effect from the start of the second suggestive effect. You may make it notify the title corresponding to.

  According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed. Good.

  With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the suggestion effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period. May be.

  With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, a detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and a specific display corresponding to the detection means ( For example, a specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs the small button image 31AK043, the large button image 31AK047, and the stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display execution unit is the first specific display as the specific display. It is possible to display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display, and detection by the detection means is possible. In the non-effective period of, after displaying the first specific display, 1 specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)), and during the effective period of the detection by the detecting means, the action effect using the changed second specific display May be executed (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).

  With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

  (8) In the gaming machine according to any of (1) to (7) above, as a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display in which the display size is the first size (FIG. 19). (A) The shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed during the shutter effect shown in (a) and the second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (the one displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19D). A display unit (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a two-size reach title image 31AK062) is further provided, and the display unit includes a plurality of types of elements having different modes (FIG. 19A). , Element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in (d)). An image (a fruit pattern or the like shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) can be displayed, and any of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display is displayed in a pattern including the specific image. , A plurality of types of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (in either shutter image 31AK061 or reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D). May be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 109SG)
Next, the characteristic part of this embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 20-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 109SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. It is composed of a frame (underframe) 3. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 109SG003, a glass door frame 109SG003a having a glass window is provided between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and a door closing position for closing the front surface of the gaming machine frame 109SG003. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 109SG003a. When the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 109SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and the glass. The door frame 109SG003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 109SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 109SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting switch 109SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operating unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052, is housed in the substrate case 109SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 are included. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 109SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 109SG201.

  Since the board case 109SG201 having the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the game machine frame 3 by using it. Further, the lock switch 109SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The lock switch 109SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) by the setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

  Further, a display monitor 109SG029 and a display changeover switch 109SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 109SG029 are arranged on the board case 109SG201. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display change-over switch 109SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 109SG201. That is, the display monitor 109SG029 and the display change-over switch 109SG030 are arranged in front of the main case 11 of the board case 109SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized without opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 109SG003 opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4, at the right end of the outer frame 109SG001a, the right side of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. A security cover 109SG500A that covers the portion from the back side is attached. The security cover 109SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 109SG500Aa facing the front-rear direction and a long piece 109SG500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 109SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 109SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 109SG201. The security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 109SG001a via the front end of the short piece 109SG500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-3, the long piece 109SG500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 109SG201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. By doing so, the right side portion of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 become inoperable due to the long piece 109SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-4, in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 109SG003 to move from the long piece 109SG500Ab. The separated state releases the covering state of the long piece 109SG500Ab, and the state becomes an operable state.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. While the state is maintained, in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 109SG500A described above is released, and the operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 109SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 unless the store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 109SG003 with the door key.

  However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or the like, which is installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the lock switch 109SG051. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 109SG052 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is performed, the security cover 109SG500A switches between the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Regulations restricting operations on the operation unit including the switch 109SG052 By being maintained state, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Further, even when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 is covered by the security cover 109SG500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 109SG500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 109SG201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like on the main board 11 are mounted and the seal and the like.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 20-1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, an LED (light emitting diode) of a segment or a dot matrix, and is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each. A certain special symbol (also called "special symbol") is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, respectively, variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  Symbol numbers corresponding to each of the special symbols of a plurality of types are attached. As an example, each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is assigned a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number of “10”. Just do it. Below, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". ..

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, the numbers indicating "0" to "9" and the symbol indicating "-"), or the types may be different. May be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, respectively, may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99", for example. .. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are illustrated as square shapes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first special symbol display devices are not limited thereto. Each segment constituting the symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be arranged irregularly.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, three corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the decorative pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions, the effect pattern (also referred to as decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, is variably displayed.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, The variation (for example, vertical scroll display) of the effect symbols is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The finalized production design (final stop design), which is the variable display result of the production design, is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, the variable display using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, or the variable display using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the above, a variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified is performed, and a fixed effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to end the variable display by performing stop display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) of identification information such as effect symbols. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the derivation display of the fixed effect symbol which is the variable display result, the variation speed of the effect symbol becomes “0”, and the effect The design may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the effect symbol completely in a stopped state for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing a slight shake or expansion / contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "9" or Chinese characters) are included in the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. It may be a number, an English character, nine character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “9” are assigned to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. Note that the effect symbols are not limited to nine types, and may be of any type (e.g., eight types or ten types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a combination causing a loss can be configured.

  After the variable display of the effect design is started, the decorative effect display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed until the fixed effect design which is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow from upper to lower sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the effect symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, "9") is displayed, The design symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a symbol with a large symbol number to a symbol with a small symbol number. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the highest symbol number may be subsequently displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a first hold storage display area 109SG005D and a second hold storage display area 109SG005U are arranged. An active display area 109SG005F that displays a hold display corresponding to storage as an active display is displayed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol, the game ball passes (entry) through the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Is generated based on the winning prize for starting. That is, the start condition (also called “execution condition”) for executing the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed, or the pachinko game machine. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied due to the fact that 1 is controlled to the big hit game state, the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is suspended. The hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D is a hold display that is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Is a hold display that is generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

  In particular, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the present embodiment displays a hold 1 display position for displaying the first first special figure hold display from the bottom to the top, and a second first special figure hold display. Hold 2 display position to display, hold 3 display position to display third 1st special figure hold display, hold 4 display position to display 4th 1st special figure hold display, and each hold The display can be displayed.

  A character image 109SGC is displayed at a position above the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D in the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 20-27). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the details of which will be described later, but a new start winning occurs, the hold display moves from the character image 109SGC toward the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the active display area 109SG005F. It is possible to execute the starting prize winning production.

  In the present embodiment, the hold display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is displayed in a circular white shape (the hold displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D). A memory display), and the hold display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning opening is displayed in a circular white color (the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is a hold storage). Display). It should be noted that, based on the hold display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the starting winning due to the passing (entering) of the gaming ball through the second starting winning opening The display mode of the generated hold display may be different from the display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-1, along with the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U, on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the number of special symbol reservation storage A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for identifiable display. The first reserved display device 25A displays the number of the first special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The second reserved display device 25B displays the number of second special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of storages for which execution of variable display using the first special figure is pending. The second special figure pending storage number is the number of storages for which execution of variable display using the second special figure is pending. The variable storage pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages, and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

  General winning openings 109SG050A, 109SG050D are provided on the left and right of the image display device 5, and general winning openings 109SG050B, 109SG050C are provided in an area below the general winning openings 109SG050A. Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal open state (see the solid line position in FIG. 20-1) and the tilted position (in FIG. 20-1) in the vertical position by the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 20-2. An ordinary electric accessory having a movable wing piece that changes to an enlarged open state (refer to a position indicated by a dotted line) is provided to form a second starting winning opening.

  As an example, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 109SG081 for an ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning port. It will be difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port (entry) by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the on state. ) Enlarged and open state. The variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second start winning port even in the normally open state, but is less likely to enter the game ball than in the expanded opening state. You may comprise so that it may become. Alternatively, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and a normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 20-2. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 20-2. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4 ”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4 ”) or less, the second start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different from each other.

  The game balls that have passed (entered) the general winning opening 109SG050A, 109SG050B, 109SG050C, 109SG050D are the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, and the third general winning opening switch shown in FIG. 20-2. It is detected by 109SG026C and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, and based on the detection, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 in which the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B are integrated is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 20-1, the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 has a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A on the left side and a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B on the right side. Further, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, and the player can insert the special variable winning ball unit via the cover body. In 109SG007, especially the game ball flowing down in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B can be visually recognized.

  The first special variable winning a prize ball device 109SG007A is provided with a first special winning opening door 109SG701 which is opened and closed by a solenoid 109SG082 (see FIG. 20-2), and is opened and closed by the first special winning opening door 109SG701. Form a changing first big winning opening. The first special winning opening is formed on the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 so as to open upward. The first special winning opening door 109SG701 is slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position where the solenoid 109SG082 is driven to close the first special winning opening and an open position where the first special winning opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, when the solenoid 109SG082 is on, the first special winning opening door 109SG701 opens the first special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the first special winning opening. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG082 is in the off state, the first special winning opening door 109SG701 closes the first special winning opening to prevent the game ball from passing (entering) the first special winning opening. In this way, the first special winning opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for the player to easily pass (enter) the game ball and a closed state that is unfavorable to the player because the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball. In addition to the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the first big winning opening is provided. May be.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 109SG023 by passing through the first count switch 109SG023 (see FIG. 20-2) provided in the first special winning opening. To be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 109SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 109SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first special winning opening which has been opened in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the first special winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, the game ball can enter the first special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first special winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the first special winning opening and obtain the winning ball. And the second state is disadvantageous to the player.

  Also, most of the game balls that have flowed down without entering the first big winning opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an unillustrated obstacle nail or the like, and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded open state, the second start. It is designed to win prizes.

  The second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B shown in FIG. 20-14 is formed so as to project upward from the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 109SG083 (see FIG. 20-2). The second special winning opening door 109SG711 is provided, and the second special winning opening door 109SG711 forms a second special winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second special winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B. The second special winning opening door 109SG711 is between a first state (open state) in which the second special winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 109SG083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second special winning opening is closed. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-back direction.

  In the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second special winning opening door 109SG711 is in the on state, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 opens the second special winning opening, and the game ball is the first. Make it easy to pass (enter) through the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second special winning opening door 109SG711 is off, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 closes the second special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening. (Entry) can not be done. In this way, the second special winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the second special winning opening is provided. May be.

  The game ball passing through (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the second count switch 109SG024A by passing through the second count switch 109SG024A installed in the second special winning opening shown in FIG. 20-14. To be done. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 109SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second special winning opening which has been opened in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, another normal winning such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the second special winning opening. And the second state is disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 20-14, a game ball flow path 109SG750 is formed in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B so that the game balls that have passed through the second special winning opening can flow down. The game ball flow path 109SG750 is a main path 109SG740 (a region along the solid line in FIG. 20-14) through which the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening can pass, and a branch path 109SG741 (FIG. 20-) that branches from the main path 109SG740. 14 along the middle dotted line). A backflow prevention member 109SG730, which will be described later, is arranged between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741. Further, a first branch portion 109SG742 branching from the main path 109SG740 into a branch path 109SG741 is provided on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740. A second branching unit 109SG743, which branches from the main path 109SG740 to the branching path 109SG741, is provided. That is, the game ball flowing down the main path 109SG740 can be moved from the first branch portion 109SG742 or the second branch portion 109SG743 to the branch path 109SG741 side.

  A third count switch 109SG024B through which a game ball can pass is installed in the most downstream portion of the main path 109SG740, and the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B, whereby the third count switch 109SG024B is used. To be detected. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 109SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. In addition, the game ball that reaches the most downstream portion of the branch path 109SG741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 and passes through the fourth count switch 109SG024C. , Detected by the fourth count switch 109SG024C.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game described later, the game state after the small hit game is finished is controlled to the big hit game state. There is. Therefore, while the second big winning opening door 109SG711 is open during the small hitting game, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration and the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 109SG024B. Then, it becomes possible to cheat by controlling the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is stopped in such a case.

  A regulating member 109SG721 that regulates and permits the flow down of the game ball toward the third count switch 109SG024B is provided on the downstream side of the first branch portion 109SG742 in the main path 109SG740. The restriction member 109SG721 is a restriction state that restricts the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 109SG024B on the main path 109SG740 by projecting into the main path 109SG740 by driving the solenoid 109SG085 (see FIG. 20-2). It is provided slidably in the front-back direction between the main path 109SG740 and an allowance state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down to the third count switch 109SG024B on the main path 109SG740 by retracting from the inside.

  The upper portion of the restriction member 109SG721 is formed as a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 109SG740 so as to incline downward by a predetermined angle toward the branch path 109SG741 side in a front view. .. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the main path 109SG740 when the restriction member 109SG721 is in the restricted state, the game ball moves along the flat surface formed on the upper part of the restriction member 109SG721 to the second branch portion 109SG743. The vehicle is guided so as to flow down toward the branch path 109SG741.

  Between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741, a backflow prevention member 109SG730 is rotatably supported by a pivot that faces the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 109SG730 is a plate-shaped member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when the game ball guided by the flat surface of the restriction member 109SG721 comes in contact with the main path 109SG740 side, the branch path from the main path 109SG740 side It can be moved (rotated) so that it can pass to the 109SG741 side. Specifically, the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741 can be rotated between an allowable position that is inclined so as to open and a regulation position that closes the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741. It is provided. A rib 109SG801 protruding forward is provided above the restriction member 109SG721, and the backflow prevention member 109SG730 contacts the rib 109SG801 from the counterclockwise direction in a front view at the restriction position.

  The backflow prevention member 109SG730 is normally disposed at the restriction position by its own weight, and at the restriction position, the game ball guided on the flat surface comes in contact with the main path 109SG740 side (right side in front view). , Is rotated by the game ball clockwise when viewed from the front, with the allowable position being the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 109SG743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the main path where the third count switch 109SG024B is provided. The movement of the game ball from the 109SG740 side to the branch path 109SG741 side where the fourth count switch 109SG024C is provided is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is in the restricted position, even if the game ball abuts from the branch path 109SG741 side (left side in front view), the backflow prevention member 109SG730 abuts the rib 109SG801 to prevent the backflow. Rotation of the member 109SG730 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 109SG743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the game ball, so that the fourth count switch 109SG024C is provided. The movement of the game ball from the branch path 109SG741 side to the main path 109SG740 side where the third count switch 109SG024B is provided is reliably regulated.

  Returning to FIG. 20-1, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 20-1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also referred to as "general drawing" or "normal drawing") that is variably displayed (variable display).

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reservations as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 109SG041. The passage gate 109SG041 is installed between the first special variable winning ball unit 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball unit 109SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. A gate switch 21, which will be described later, is built in the passage gate 109SG041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, prize holes other than the above-mentioned prize holes may be provided. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball serving as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor provided in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied (stored) to the ball striking device. The upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the bottom of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The lower plate member forming the lower plate is attached with a stick controller 31A that can be tilted by a player and held at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). ing. In the upper plate member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of a center decorative frame that surrounds the image display device 5 arranged at the substantially central position of the game area. , The game ball weakly launched (left hit) by the hit ball operation handle flows down the first path (left game area), and the game ball strongly hit (right hit) by the hit ball operation handle is the second path ( Right game area).

  Also, the game ball flowing down the first route can be won in the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the gaming ball flowing down the second route is the variable winning ball device 6B, the first special variable winning ball device. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B can be won and can pass through the passage gate 109SG041. That is, in the case of left-handedness, the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B cannot be won, and the passage gate 109SG041 cannot be passed.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, such that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 109SG041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the universal figure start condition for execution is satisfied, based on that the universal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the variable display of the previous general figure has ended The variable display of the universal figure by the symbol display device 20 is started.

  In the variation display of the ordinary symbol, after starting the variation of the ordinary symbol, when the predetermined time which is the ordinary symbol variation time elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol which is the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a particular ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, for example, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “ordinary symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal figure", the expansion opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position. The normal opening control for returning to the vertical position after a lapse of a predetermined time is performed.

  After the first starting condition is satisfied by the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 20-2, For example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the fact that the last special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 20-2. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the variation display of the previous special figure or the jackpot gaming state being ended, the variable display of the special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. ..

  In the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, Definite display of the fixed special symbol (fluctuation display result) that is the fluctuation display result. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the "big hit" as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

  After the variable display result in the special display variable display is "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. It After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols. , The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The symbols may be used, or the special symbols common to the variable displays of both special symbols may be the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the first special winning opening device 109SG007A first big winning opening door The 109SG701 opens the first special winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A is brought into the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). Even before the number of times the round has been executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not won in the first big winning opening). Good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes the "small hit" as the specific display result, in the small hit game state, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B The second big winning opening 109SG711 opens the second big winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. State. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hitting game state. It is not limited to this, and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state.

  In the small hitting game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes the third count switch 109SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the third count switch 109SG024B of the game ball is passed. It is a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B of the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state passes the fourth count switch 109SG024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state on the basis of detecting the passage of the fourth count switch 109SG024C of the gaming ball.

  Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B of the game ball, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Has elapsed or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls have been generated, the second special winning opening is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is set in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is controlled to the first state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball is not won in the second special winning opening). Good.

  In addition, after the jackpot gaming state in the present embodiment is finished, the time saving state and the time saving control in which the time shortening control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined variation range (for example, 100 times or 20 times) are performed. Not controlled either with normal conditions. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after turning on the power). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. The time saving control is that the variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the big hit game state is finished, the change display result is “big hit”, and the small hit game state is set. The game ball may pass through the third count switch 109SG024B, and may end when any one of the conditions is established first.

  When the time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time (special figure variation time) in the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B than in the normal state, ordinarily Control that shortens the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the public figure by the pattern display 20 (general drawing fluctuation time) than in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of the general drawing each time is "Public figure hit" Control for improving the probability of becoming higher than that in the normal state, the tilting control time for performing tilting control of the movable wing piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "universal hit" is in the normal state. To increase the possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second starting winning opening, such as control to make it longer than that in the normal state. Player Advantageous to become control is performed taking. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded opening state is higher than that in the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the variable display of the special figure can be frequently executed. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period in which the high opening control can be executed is also called a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the time saving control is performed. The game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has various types such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a terminal board (information output board) 16 and a power supply board 17 as shown in FIG. 20-2. Control board is mounted. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 20-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 109SG201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on / off / coloring the normal symbol display 20 It also has a control function.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-15 (A), the main substrate 11 is provided with a display monitor 109SG029 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 109SG029 is provided. , It also has a function to display various winning information about winning. A display changeover switch 109SG030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 109SG029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 109SG030.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-2, on the main board 11, a door opening sensor 109SG090 for detecting opening of the glass door frame 109SG003a that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and opening of the first big winning opening door 109SG701. Various sensors such as a first special winning opening door sensor 109SG091 for detecting the opening, a second special winning opening door sensor 109SG092 for detecting opening of the second special winning opening door 109SG711, etc. are connected. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signal output from the sensor.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, for example. Information output for outputting various signals such as a switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100, a solenoid drive signal from the game controlling microcomputer 100 to the solenoids 109SG081 to 83, a terminal board 109SG016, and a security signal. The circuit 109SG112 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-15 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 20-2 is enclosed in a substrate case 109SG201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, A display monitor 109SG029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 109SG030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 109SG029. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display change-over switch 109SG030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized without opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 109SG003 opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (first winning opening, second winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings). Mouth, hereinafter also referred to as "entry area"), the number of game spheres entered is totaled, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios based on the total are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. By displaying these winning information, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as continuous ratio and winning ratio after installation in the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. Further, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment was made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 109SG201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. 20-3, and a setting change state or setting described later is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface of the power supply board 17. A lock switch 109SG051 (see FIG. 20-2) for switching to the confirmation state, and a setting switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a jackpot which will be described later in the setting change state. 109SG052 (see FIG. 20-2) is provided.

  The lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 109SG003 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only a store clerk who has a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 109SG051 requires a key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 109SG051 can operate the lock switch 109SG051. Further, the lock switch 109SG051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key and also an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation.

  It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in the lower portion on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 109SG070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 109SG070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG. 20-2.

  The output circuit 109SG111 is also connected to the controller 109SG084 for driving the solenoid 109SG085. The controller 109SG084 starts driving control of the solenoid 109SG085 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 109SG111 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. By the controller 109SG084 driving the solenoid 109SG085, the restricting member 109SG721 repeats the restricting state and the permitting state every one second regardless of the game state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 20-5 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is displayed in a variable manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) which one of a plurality of types is used for the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command which notifies the advance determination result that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small hit B".

  Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating variable stop (determination) of effect symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first reserved storage number in order to display the special reservation storage number in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D or the like in a identifiable manner. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified in the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D100 is a V winning notification designating command for notifying that the V count has been won, that is, the game ball has passed through the third count switch 109SG024B and the third count switch 109SG024B has been turned on.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the disturbance for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  It should be noted that although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 20-6, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the effect symbol corresponds to each of "non-reach" and "reach", and also changes. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the effect design is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the effect design is “reach” is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, so that the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined by the fluctuation pattern type, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super-reach type, etc. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided to The variation to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined variation pattern after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number It is also possible to determine the turn.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-7, the form in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variation content (effect content) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same according to the set value that is set. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, it is a variation pattern that causes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach-missing, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed 3 times and the variation pattern that becomes super-reach-missing may be set.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), and FIG. -8 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in Fig. 20-9 (A), big hit type determination shown in Fig. 20-9 (B) table (for the second special symbol), other Koatari type determination table shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), big hit for variation pattern determination table (not shown), Koatari for variation pattern determination table (not shown), loss A variation pattern determination table (not shown), a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. Has become. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the highest payout rate, the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

  20-8 (A) to 20 (C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is "2" or "3", there is a higher probability (1/99) to win the big hit, and some of these judgment values correspond to the small hit. Since it is set as the determination value to be set, the small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set values are “2” and “3”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol wins the big hit with the same probability (1/99) as when it is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values By being set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, the small hit is won with a higher probability (100/200) than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The set value is "1" because the big hit is won with a lower probability (1/150) than a certain case, and a part of these judgment values is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It is designed to win the small hit with a lower probability (1/99) than the case. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is the target of the variable display, while winning the big hit with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, half of these judgment values By being set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the same probability as when the set value is "1". (100/200) will win the small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 20-8 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set. However, the determination value corresponding to the small hit is not set, therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, when the set value is "1", "2" It wins the big hit with a lower probability (1/200), but does not win the small hit (win probability: 0). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is a big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when it is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values By being set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, the probability is higher than in the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the set values are "1" and "2". With the same probability (100/200) as in the above case, the small win is won.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to 20 (C), the winning probability of the small hit is the same when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second. However, the winning probability of the small hit may be lowered in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is set to decrease in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the second. The winning probability may be the same for all set values.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-8A to 20C. The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined by using different tables for the first and second variation special figure designation buffers.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 20-8 (C), except for the determination value corresponding to the big hit. The judgment value of is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is corresponded to the small hit. It may be set as a determination value so that a small hit is won. That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  20-9 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 20-9 (A), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 20-9 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The jackpot type determination table is, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. Is a table that is referenced to determine

  FIG. 20-9 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table is a small hit type A or small hit B based on a random number (MR2) for determining a small hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit type D big hit game is executed. When the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. It is supposed to be done. That is, these big hits D and big hits E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the hit type extracted at the time of winning the start, and the game ball during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. Is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the third count switch 109SG024B has passed.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20-10. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A and a jackpot D in which time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The big hit B, big hit C, and big hit E are set in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game state is over. That is, among these big hits A to big hits E, the big hits C and E are big hits most advantageous to the player, and the big hits A and D are big hits most disadvantageous to the player. Since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a smaller hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Of these big hits A to big hits E, the big hit A is a big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of big hit A ends, time saving control is not executed.

  The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Also, after the jackpot B big hit game state is finished, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again before the special figure game is executed 20 times.

  The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the first big winning opening is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot C large hit game state ends, the time saving control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed, or until a big hit occurs again before 100 special figure games are executed.

  The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Also, after the big hit game state of the big hit D, the time saving control is not executed.

  The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. After the jackpot E is in the jackpot game state, the time saving control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed or until a big hit occurs again before 100 special figure games are executed.

  In addition, the big hit D and the big hit E are the big winning openings to be opened are the second big winning openings 109SG712, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning openings of the big hit D and the big hit E are to be opened. May be the first big winning opening. That is, for the big hit D and the big hit E, the second big winning opening 109SG712 is opened for the small hit game, and the second big winning opening 109SG712 is given as the big hit game based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game. Instead, open the 1st big prize hole.

  It should be noted that in the time saving state, the probability of being a "universal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the V winning of the game ball during the small hit game, so the big hit game state is normal. A so-called condominium state is likely to occur continuously without going through the state.

  In the short-time state after the big hit game of the big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, a small hit occurs during the special figure game of 20 times, and the game is played. The rate at which the ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the gaming ball wins V and a big hit occurs during the 20 special drawing games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the short-time state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so a small hit occurs during the special figure game of 100 times. However, the rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the game ball wins V during a special game of 100 times and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100%.

  In the present embodiment, five types of big hits A to big E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more big hit types may be provided. Moreover, four or less types may be provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 49 are assigned to the big hit A, 50 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

  In this way, when the big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining big hit B or big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lowered in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. , 0 to 29 are assigned to the big hit A, 30 to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. 270 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 270 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining big hits B and C in which time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is a big hit in the special drawing game of the first special symbol. Is higher than in the case of occurrence, and becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 (A) and 20-9 (B), when the set value that is set is 1, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot C. The proportion is highest, followed by the jackpot B, which is the highest proportion, and the jackpot A, which is the lowest proportion (the jackpot type determination proportion in setting value 1: jackpot C> jackpot B> jackpot A). In addition, when the set value that is set is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest determination rate, followed by the jackpot A with the highest determination rate, and the jackpot C with the lowest determination rate (set value Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value that is set is 3, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type A at the highest rate, the jackpot B is then determined at the highest rate, and the jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate. (The jackpot type determination ratio in the setting value 3: jackpot A> jackpot B> jackpot C).

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is jackpot is determined from jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C at different rates according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one or more jackpot types that are not determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, depending on the set value that is set. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), in the small hit type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 0 to 99 is small in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. The hit A is allocated, and 100 to 299 are allocated to the small hit B. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. There is. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. There is.

  In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the big hit E, which is 100 times the special figure game in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100, is 20 times. It is set to be higher than the proportion for determining the big hit D, and to become lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), when the set value being set is 1, the small hit B is higher than the small hit A as the small hit type. As a result of the determination, the percentage of the jackpot type determined to be a jackpot E based on the occurrence of a V winning during the small hit game is higher than the percentage determined to the jackpot D (V in the setting value 1). Jackpot type determination rate by winning: jackpot E> jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hit A and the small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type D and the jackpot E is determined to be the same (the jackpot type determination rate based on the V prize at the set value 2 is jackpot E = jackpot D). Further, when the set value that is set is 3, it is based on the fact that the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit B, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot type D at a higher rate than the jackpot type E is determined (a jackpot type determination rate due to a V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination rate of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot and the determination rate of the jackpot type when a V winning occurs are different according to the set value. That is, that is, the type of small hit game state controlled according to the set value that is set may change, and the type of big hit game state that is controlled when a V winning occurs may change. , You can improve the fun of playing games.

  In the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the small hit type varies depending on the set value that has been set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value that is set, Of the small hits A and the small hits B, there may be small hit types that are not determined. That is, if the determination rate of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the small hit type is determined using the common small hit type determination table regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. When the small hit type is determined at different rates according to the variation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B depending on the variation special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different rates according to the variation special map, do not determine either one of the small hit types (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. It also includes making a decision at a rate of 100%.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit type and the small hit type are determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for the big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type and the small hit type are used. At least one of the hit types may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit C and the small hit type as the big hit type. Although the small hit B is easily determined), the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player. You may do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 20-10 to FIG. Although the form itself does not change, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, if the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game is based on the game ball passing through the third count switch 109SG024B during the big hit game. While controlling the gaming state after the end to the probability variation state, the gaming property (so-called V probability variation type) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the third count switch 109SG024B during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map is a pachinko game. If the set value set to machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). There may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the third count switch 109SG024B. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same in playability as 1 to 3, the probability of a big hit or a small hit is higher than that in the case of any of these set values 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch 109SG024B is switched to the effect switch (a predetermined effect is executed each time the gaming ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B. If the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch 109SG024B is used as a game switch (a game ball has passed the third count switch 109SG024B) and the game state is changed to a certain state. It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “miss” are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-11 (A) and 20-11 (B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (big hit B, big hit C) used when the big hit types are big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (big hit) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a part of the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A constant random number value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 20-11 (A), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 0 in the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3. Up to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 350 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 850 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and the shift patterns of 851 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  As shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is from 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and the range 151 to 450 is set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. The set value is higher than the set value, and set values 1, 2 and 3 are lower in that order. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination value is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super-reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of "1", "2", and "3", the MR3 Of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for small hits. With the set values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-miss in the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base medium summed pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “2”, 0 to 400 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 700 is assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach lose variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the change pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the change pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 0 to 450 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of the determination value of MR3 of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 0 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, which is a range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of the determination value of MR3 of 0 to 997, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 0 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  As described above, when using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes low in the order of 3. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 of the determination values are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by the common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  The “common determination rate” in the present embodiment is that the determination rate is completely the same at different setting values (the present embodiment), and the determination rate is the same at different setting values. (E.g., the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach differs between the set value 1 to the set value 3 by about 1%).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the variation display result is not limited to this, and if the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is The determination rate of only one of the determination rate and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super-reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value that is set is Regardless of this, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super-reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that is set, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, if the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12, the variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening of the fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display is lengthened.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) to 20-12 (C), the variation pattern is determined using different variation variation determination tables for loss depending on the total number of pending storages. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the number of pending storage in the special symbol of the change target (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is reserved) The variation pattern may be determined by using a variation variation determination table for a different memory depending on the number of memories and the variation display of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss (PA2-2. And PA2-3) have the same range of random number values. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display is actually performed in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss (variation pattern of the super-reach loss). The appearance rate of) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the variation display is performed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to, but the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value are taken into consideration, and the change display is the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the change pattern of the super reach change. It may be executed.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in, for example, FIG. Has been. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 20-13 is a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 are provided.

  1st special figure reservation storage section 109SG151A, the game sphere passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize sphere device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the figure game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning number (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the first start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. , And is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

  Although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has been generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B has not yet started. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning number in the second starting winning opening (detection order of the game ball) with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

  The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start port data indicating which of the first start winning port and the second start winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The ordinary figure holding storage unit 109SG151C stores the holding information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball passing through the passage gate 109SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 109SG041, and the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

  The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various external devices to the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting a signal.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, on the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. The RAM 122 that provides the display, the display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the CPU 120 for effect control, update the numerical data indicating the random number value. A random number circuit 124 for performing and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121 by a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. A variation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variation data, a reception operation in which the production control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the production control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the production control CPU 120 performs I / O. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  Wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control substrate 13, in the production control board 12. The lamp control board 14 is connected with a wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating the LED data.

  As with the main board 11, for example, a random number value (also referred to as a random number for effect) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set on the effect control board 12 side.

  In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that forms various production control patterns. There is.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of performance control patterns to be used, a display screen displayed in notification of various errors (abnormalities), an error notification pattern such as a lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 and output sound are stored. There is. The effect control pattern is made up of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. , Data display showing the control contents of various production operations such as production display variation display operation, reach production, production display operation in re-lottery production, etc., or various production display operations not accompanied by production design variation display Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are configured from data indicating the control contents thereof.

  The special figure variation time production control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2, an effect control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting unit has a plurality of types of statuses that can be updated in accordance with effect operation states such as effect image display states on the screen of the image display device 5 and effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as operation of displaying effect images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of the plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting section, the first special figure start winning buffer for performing the hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U hold. The second special figure start winning buffer for displaying is set. In the first special diagram start winning buffer, a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved storage Is provided in the second special figure starting prize buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved storage. The area corresponding to "." The data of these start winning award buffers is effect control, which will be described later, in response to the reception of the first starting mouth winning award designating command and the second starting mouth winning award designating command and the reception of the first variation start command and the second variation starting command. In the hold effect process (S72, see FIG. 20-26) in the process process, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U are updated based on the updated start winning buffer data. The hold display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first start opening winning a prize designating command is received based on the fact that the first start winning opening has been won, a circular white display is displayed on the hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Is newly added, and when the first fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the first special map is newly started, the highest (of the reserved displays in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D ( Update the reserved display so that the circular white display of the earliest starting winning winning memory) is erased and the other circular white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward). To do. Similarly, when the second start opening winning a prize designation command is received based on the fact that there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening, a circular white display is newly added to the holding display in the second holding storage display area 109SG005U. On the other hand, when the second fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special map is newly started, the highest (first one) of the reserved displays in the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U is added. The circular white display of the reserved memory for which the winning is started is erased, and the circular display is updated so that the other circular white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward).

  Here, the totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

  On the main board 11, information relating to the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting opening (belt), the number of winning balls at winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the first big prize The number of prize balls by winning the prize in the mouth and the second prize winning port (attacker), the total number of prize balls are input, and the number of shot balls is totaled. The display monitor 109SG029 displays the first prize hole and the first prize hole in the total prize balls. The consecutive ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the two major prize holes (attackers), and the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the first prize ball out of the total number of prize balls The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning the prize in the big prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. It is supposed to be displayed. The consecutive ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winnings of continuous winnings) due to winning in the first and second big winning openings (attackers). The winning ratio is the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) among the total number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls from the first prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) ( It is the percentage occupied by the following number of ball acquisition). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is based on the number of prize balls from the first and second prize holes (attackers) and the prize from the second start prize hole (Den Chu). Number of prize balls and prize balls due to winning in prize holes (first start prize hole, general prize hole) other than the first prize hole, second prize hole (attacker) and second starting prize hole (Den Chu) It is the sum of the numbers and. The first big winning opening, the second big winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the width of the game ball that can be passed varies, thereby winning the game ball. It is an accessory whose expected ratio changes. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning opening, the second winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and are games. The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the assumed winning rate of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio, the number of winning balls at the first starting opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces (Number of general awards balls), number of regular electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), first prize hole and second prize hole The number of special electric player award balls (attacker award balls), which is the number of awards balls due to winning the (Attacker), is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning at the first starting mouth (navel) and the general prize opening (sode) to be totaled, the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and the special electric role The number of prize balls (attacker prize ball number) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. There is. In other words, 6000 11 sets of storage are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of these totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 109SG029 has a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and cumulative combination ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting mouth (belt) that is aggregated as the game progresses, winning in the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) The number of prize balls due to, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) are changed. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) of 6000 is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 displayed thereafter, the number of winning balls is 6000. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting mouth (belly), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), the winning of the first major winning opening and the second major winning opening (attacker) If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, the display timing of the consecutive ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy occurs. Can be prevented.

The storage area in which information about the winning of the game in the present embodiment are stored is provided for each set value, the general winning hole prize balls and first start hole prize balls, ordinary conductive officers prize balls, special collector The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hit balls are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base of the present embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the first big prize hole and the second big prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating the character ratio (role ratio (%)) in the case where the number of character acquisition balls, which is the total of the number of prize balls by winning the prize, is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and Den Chu. Further, the number of consecutive winning prize balls means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be calculated by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).
Continuation ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning roles + number of winning roles) / total number of winnings] x 100 (2)
Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total driving] x 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls acquired is 42000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are rounded down) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the character ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down to calculate the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are both 10. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

  The substrate case 109SG201 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 109SG029 are visible. The board case 109SG201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 109SG029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029. Note that the “direct front” here means a direct front from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who is going to visually recognize the main board 11. Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down to calculate the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area (ring buffer, 10-set total buffer (total of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters each having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of acquired balls is larger than the stored value of the total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area in which information about game winnings is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls for continuous winnings is greater than the value of the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display and the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed together with or after the error display and the warning display. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the winning ratio (%), if the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning role balls is 19876 as an example, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When the game control microcomputer 100 performs a calculation, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, and therefore the calculation formula is replaced as follows. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 1987/343 = 57.9475. Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the combination ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. In this case, there is an error in the display from the value calculated by the accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced by the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even in the display of the error of 1%.

  Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. Therefore, until the counter counts the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more, the ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if the display is performed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 109SG029 displays the winning combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs that a game medium is newly won in the electric chu or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the continuous ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. Therefore, it is preferable to calculate the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) in the same interrupt and sequentially display the calculated values.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided in two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 109SG029 shown in FIG. 20-15 (A) can display numerical values in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a game medium is detected by a sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chute, and each prize ball number is individually tabulated based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, using the sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium won in the attacker and the game medium won in the electric Chu are combined, and the detection result thereof is used. It is also possible to add up the number of character acquisition balls and the number of continuous character acquisition balls based on.

  Hereinafter, the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general prize number counter and a big prize number counter are provided. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the numbers of winnings of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) are totaled by the big winning number counter, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather than individually, a first big prize number counter that counts the number of prizes to these first big prize holes and a second big prize number counter that counts the number of prizes to the second big prize hole are individually provided. The number of winnings to the first big winning opening and the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be separately calculated, and these winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general winning prize counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A. The second general winning a prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second general winning a prize mouth switch 109SG026B. The third general winning prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C. The fourth general winning prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A.

  A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the continuous ratio and the ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when there is no choice but to repeat the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated during the collection of data for the normal calculation of the ratio and the winning combination. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  The RTC 106 is provided on the main board 11 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 is capable of measuring the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 109SG201. A caulking pin (not shown) is attached to the board case 109SG201. By providing the caulking pins, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 109SG201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 109SG201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as "crimped substrate case").

  The display monitor 109SG029 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the board case 109SG201 to prove that the main board 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 109SG201. The sealing sticker is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is obstructed, such as the front of the display monitor 109SG029. In this way, the display monitor 109SG029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker.

  The display monitor 109SG029 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw a letter "8", and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display unit 29A to fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  Each item of the display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 20-15 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display section 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display section 29B of the second digit and the third display section 29C of the third digit. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 29D at the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 29E at the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second start winning port in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning port in the jackpot gaming state. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. Further, when the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of percentage is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” Is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  The main board 11 uses the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The total number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103, in the main process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, and the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A to fourth general. A switch process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 109SG026D and the discharging switch 109SG070.

  In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, which entry area the game ball has entered is specified. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, If the detection signals are output from the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A, the values of the first start prize number counter and the second start prize number counter are added. , When the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, the first general winning number counter, 2nd General Prize Number Counter, 3rd General Prize Number Counter, 4th General Prize Number Counter Input value, and when a detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 109SG070, by adding the value of the driving number counter, the number of game balls entering each entry area (to each winning opening) The number of winning game balls) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of winning game balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls for winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole.

  As shown in FIG. 20-16, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball obtained by winning the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)). ), 1st starting prize hole award ball (award ball due to winning at the 1st starting award prize hole (navel)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to winning a Den Chu), special electric role award ball (to attacker) Is the number of prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 individually counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first starting opening. The number of winning game balls to the player may be collectively tabulated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In this way, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each prize hole, a total sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and a total accumulation area. There is. The storage area for the total sum and the total sum for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, it is possible to store 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60,000 data can be reserved. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio combination ratio storage area for storing ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2) and a base for 10 sets of the previous time (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio are stored in the ratio ratio storage area. Each of the combination ratio ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the total ratios for 10 sets and the total sum is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, when storing the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum, it is possible to store them with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter when storing them as integers.

  In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the base for the 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits to the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. 20-17 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 20-17, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. The same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the internal register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via the register area. Write the data of.

  Further, the address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) in the memory space are non-use areas.

  A RAM area (16K byte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas as shown in FIG. 20-18. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Reference data referred to by the above-mentioned control program is temporarily stored in the constituted control program data (may be simply referred to as control program data), and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the various lottery data described above) is temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas, data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the cumulative ratio of the total sum. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area and 10 sets of proportion ratio storage areas. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplemental data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) that exceeds 1 byte, the data is divided into 1 bytes and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

  The main board 11 also controls the display monitor 109SG029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20-19 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), when display on the display monitor 109SG029 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-2). Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-3). The character "" is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in Fig. 20-19 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 29A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 29B. The characters are displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the setting value “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 109SG029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Furthermore, the display of these short-term serial ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative serial ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) to FIG. 29-19 (C). Based on the operation of the display changeover switch 109SG030, when the setting value is “1”, the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2, and the set value are “2”. When the set value is "3", the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed. It is possible to sequentially change the display of ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2. In addition, when the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the setting value is “1”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  If the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  Then, when the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value "1".

  The display monitor 109SG029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. The 109SG029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 without calculating the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 109SG029, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term running ratios, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storages in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer are updated. Furthermore, the storage of the ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the ratio of the 10 sets and the total accumulation for 10 sets is updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening award balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the values are “66”, “117”, “45”, and “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 10th to 10th storage areas is set to "27", "81", and "8", respectively. Update to "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Setting change process)
Next, changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-21, the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S8) in the game control main process (see FIG. 3) described above. It is determined whether or not the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11). When the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12). If the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 109SGSa13) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 109SGSa14.

  The CPU 103 accepts the operation of the setting changeover switch 109SG052 and the lock switch 109SG051 by executing the setting change process (step 109SGSa13), and enters a state in which the set value can be changed. In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the setting status of the set value on the display of the display monitor 109SG029.

  After executing the setting change process (step 109SGSa13) and then executing step S7, if the lock switch 109SG051 is OFF (step 109SGSa11; No) and the door opening sensor 109SG090 is OFF (step 109SGSa12; No). ) Reads the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 109SGSa14, sets the read setting value as the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processing of step S10 and thereafter.

  In the present embodiment, when a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process, the CPU 103 sends a command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the set value. May be output. As described above, when the CPU 103 can output a command for notifying the set value set to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the newly set set value. Therefore, at a specific timing of the game (for example, during fluctuation display or at the end of a big hit game), a notification effect of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a fixed notification effect of the set value 1) or a pachinko game It is possible to execute a set value suggesting effect or the like that suggests the set value of the gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by executing the setting change process by the CPU 103 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. When executing the setting change process, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being executed. In this way, when the CPU 103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being executed, it is necessary for the effect control that the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process. Since the CPU 120 can recognize it, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It becomes possible to inform the surroundings of this.

  For example, while the setting change process is being executed, characters such as “setting change” are displayed on the black background on the image display device 5 and voices such as “setting change” are repeatedly output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Other displays on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design or small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) may not be displayed, but these effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display The information such as “etc.” may be displayed during execution of the setting change process. Furthermore, during the execution of the setting change process of the present embodiment, since the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not executed, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device. 20 is not displayed at all, the present invention is not limited to this, during the execution of the setting change process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device A symbol indicating that the setting change process is being executed in 20 or a symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, loss) may be stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols indicating that the setting change process is being executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 while the setting change process is being executed, , A form in which a symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, a loss) is stopped and displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first pending display is provided during execution of the setting change process. The 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C may be made to emit light (for example, for repeating blinking) in a mode indicating that the setting change process is being executed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an indicator (round number indicator) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, and for instructing the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display device (right-handed display device) or the like for performing the setting is provided, these display devices may be made to emit light in a mode indicating that the setting change process is being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch is in the ON state (S3; Y), when the backup data is not stored (S4; N), or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N). The example in which the determination whether or not the lock switch 109SG051 and the door opening sensor 109SG090 are ON (109SGSa11, 109SGSaa) and the setting change process (109SGSa13) is executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off in an abnormal state or is powered in an abnormal state. Since it is a phenomenon that can occur when is turned on, it is determined that the clear switch is on. If (S3; Y) only whether the determination (109SGSa11,109SGSa12) and or tablets switches 109SG051 or door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON, the may perform the setting change processing (109SGSa13). That is, when backup data is not stored (S4; N) or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be inherited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by executing the setting change process by the CPU 103 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The CPU 103 may be capable of confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the display monitor 109SG029, while being capable of executing a process in which the set value cannot be changed (hereinafter, set confirming process). When the CPU 103 can execute the setting confirmation process in this way, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed. In this way, when the CPU 103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed, the CPU 103 indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed. Since the CPU 120 can recognize it, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It becomes possible to inform the surroundings of this.

  The setting confirmation process may be executed if the lock switch 109SG051 and the door opening sensor 109SG090 are turned on after the CPU 103 executes the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 3). However, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, during the small hit game, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed but the pending storage is present, the predetermined period after the error is detected, The lock switch 109SG051 and the door during a predetermined period such as paying out prize balls, waiting for a game ball to enter the big hit game start gate (only when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the big hit game start gate) The setting confirmation process may not be executed even when the open sensor 109SG090 is turned on.

  Further, after the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process and displays the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 109SG029, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 without switching the lock switch 109SG051. It may be possible to play a game in a state where is set.

  Next, the processing status of the setting change processing and the display mode of the display monitor 109SG029 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-22 (A) and 20-22 (B), when power is turned off (power is cut off) by an operation of a clerk at a game hall, power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 109SG029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 109SG051 is turned on. And the door open sensor 109SG090 is ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing, and the display monitor 109SG029 displays the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 as described above, as shown in FIG. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (E), the CPU 103 detects the pushing operation of the lock switch 109SG051 by a store clerk or the like in the amusement hall, and then, based on the detection of the set value displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 of the RAM 102. Store in the backup area (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 109SG029 to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared.

  20-22 (E), as shown in a characteristic part 2 (see FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46) of the present embodiment, which will be described later, the CPU 103 stores the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. It may be converted into a set secret value, and a set value designation command including the set secret value may be output to the effect control board 12. When the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives the set value designation command from the CPU 103, the set value is specified and stored from the set value designation command to store the set value. The suggestion effect (setting value suggestion effect) may be executed. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-22 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the special winning opening is opened again. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process based on the lock switch 109SG051 being turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game hall, and the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern. A decision lottery, prize ball payout, etc. are ready to be executed.

  In the setting change processing in the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 in the setting change process, the setting value most advantageous to the player (“1” in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 20-23. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 20-23 is started, the CPU 103 first executes power-off detection processing (109SGS010). Then, by performing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, the third through the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the count switch 109SG024B, the fourth count switch 109SG024C, and the outlet switch 109SG070 is determined (109SGS011).

  Subsequently, when a game ball is won in any of the general winning opening 109SG050A to general winning opening 109SG050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, and the second big winning opening 109SG712, That is, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second counting switch 109SG024A, the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch. When a detection signal is input from the 109SG026C and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, a prize ball process (109SGS012) is performed to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information such as winning ratio information, winning ratio information, base ratio, and other winning information (109SGS013), and displays winning information such as winning ratio ratio, winning ratio, and base information calculated by the winning information processing monitor 109SG029. The winning information display control process (109SGS014) is displayed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (109SGS015), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (109SGS016).

  Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (109SGS017). .. After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (109SGS018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 4B, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (109SGS019). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of one side.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (109SGS020). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155, After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal and turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. By changing from the state to the off state, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enable state, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  In the command control processing of 109SGS020, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is finished, etc. It is possible to notify the effect control board 12 of the set value periodically by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command and sending the command. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute the effect suggesting the set value at various timings such as during variable display and big hit game. May be.

  20-24 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in 109SGS018 shown in FIG. 20-23, as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (109SGS021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of 109SGS022 to 109SGS031 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152.

  In the start winning process of 109SGS021, it is determined whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize by the first start mouth switch 22A or the second start mouth switch 22B, and if there is a prize, the variable display result determination The random number value MR1 for jackpot type, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are extracted. In the case of the second start winning, it is stored in the highest rank of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B. In addition, in the starting winning process, when the starting winning occurs, the setting for transmitting the first starting mouth winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is also executed. The first start winning combination designation command and the second starting winning combination designation command are output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (109SGS020).

  Special symbol normal processing of 109SGS022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol based on the presence or absence of the pending data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 109SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 109SG151B. It is determined whether or not the special drawing game is started by the display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the display result determination table (see FIG. 20-8) and the variable display result determination according to the set value that is set, the special symbol and the effect symbol It is decided (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of "is a big hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (big hit symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a lost pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is predetermined.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of 109SGS023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected by using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, based on a result of a preliminary determination as to whether or not the variation display result is a “big hit”. It includes processing to determine whether or not. The variation pattern is determined using any of the variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-11 to 20-12 according to the set value, the variation display result, and the jackpot type. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal process of 109SGS022 and the variation pattern setting process of 109SGS023, the variation pattern including the variable display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the effect symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process or the variation pattern setting process uses the random value MR1 for the variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, of the special symbol or the effect symbol. It includes a process of determining the variable display mode.

  The special symbol variation process of 109SGS024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. For example, each time the special symbol variation process of 109SGS024 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first Whether the game is a special figure game using the first special figure on the special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer elapses. Time measurements are taken. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of 109SGS024 is the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using is only required to be controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stop process of 109SGS025 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol (derive) It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is turned on, and if the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of 109SGS026 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting for opening the first big winning opening Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first special winning opening is opened is set depending on whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". Good. As an example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the upper limit of the period during which the first special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the opening number of the first special winning opening, which is the upper limit number of rounds, is set to The "big hit A" is set to "5 times", the "big hit B" is set to "10 times", and the "big hit C" is set to "15 times", whereby the big hit state is set. Good. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit opening process of 109SGS027 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 109SG023. , Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the first special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. When returning the first special winning opening to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG082 for the first special winning opening door 109SG701, the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Will be updated to

  The big hit ending process of 109SGS028 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It includes a process of waiting until a lapse of time, a process of performing various settings (setting of a time saving flag) for starting the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  Specifically, in the big hit ending process, the type of the executed big hit is specified. When the specified big hit type is "big hit A", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" without setting the time saving flag. When the specified big hit type is "big hit B", the hour-shortening flag is set and the initial count value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" is set in the hour-shortening counter. The value of the process flag is updated to "0". When the identified big hit type is "big hit C", the hour-shortening flag is set and the count initial value ("100" in the present embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in the hour-shortening counter. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of 109SGS029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this small hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "small hit", etc., in order to start the execution of the round in the small hit game state and open the second big winning opening 109SG712. It includes the process of setting. At this time, for example, based on the fact that the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the second special winning opening 109SG712 is in the open state is set to "1 second", and the maximum number of times of executing the round is set. By setting the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 109SG712 to "1 time", the setting for the small hit state may be made. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8".

  In the present embodiment, the number of times the second big winning opening 109SG712 is opened in the small hit state is set to "1", and the upper limit of the period in which the second big winning opening 109SG712 is opened is set to "1 second". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 109SG712 in the small hit state may be two or more times, and the second large winning opening may be plural times. The upper limit of the period in which the winning opening 109SG712 is opened may be a period other than "1 second" as long as the game ball can win the second big winning opening 109SG712.

  The small hitting open process of S30 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". In this small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the second special winning opening 109SG712 is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 109SG024A, etc. Based on this, a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the second special winning opening 109SG712 to the closed state from the open state is included. Then, when returning the second special winning opening 109SG712 to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG083 for the second special winning opening door 109SG711, the value of the special figure process flag is ". 9 "is updated.

  The small hit ending process of 109SGS031 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit completion process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It includes the process of waiting until the waiting time elapses. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 20-25 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing main processing. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (109SGS051). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to a loop process of monitoring the timer interrupt flag (109SGS052). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (109SGS053) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 109SGS054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 20-5) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (109SGS055). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (109SGS056), and then the process proceeds to 109SGS052.

  20-26 is a flowchart showing the production control process process (109SGS055) in the production control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold effect process for executing effect control relating to the hold display and the active display (109SGS072). In the hold effect process according to the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start mouth winning designation command and the second start mouth winning designation command, and then the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005D. It is possible to display the hold display in the active display area 109SG005F based on the update of the hold display in the 2 hold storage display area 109SG005U and the reception of the first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command. Further, in the hold effect process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first start winning effect and the second starting prize effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-27 (A) and 20-27 (B), the first start winning effect is that the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the active display area 109SG005F is active. In the variable display in which the display is displayed, when the starting winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the holding display is changed from the character image 109SGC to the display position of the new holding display in the first holding storage display area 109SG005D. It is a moving display effect. The movement display of the hold display of the first start winning effect is displayed at the position (the hold in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D that is determined in advance based on the first special figure hold storage number at the start of the first start winning effect. It ends by moving to a position determined according to the number of memories.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-27 (C) and 20-27 (D), the second start winning effect is the first in the state where the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed. This is an effect in which, when a start winning is generated at the start winning opening, the active display is moved and displayed from the character image 109SGC to the active display area 109SG005F via the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of 109SGS073 to 109SGS082 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuating pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073): It is confirmed whether or not a varying pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed in the command analysis process whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing (109SGS074).

  Production symbol variation start processing (109SGS074): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (109SGS075).

  Production symbol fluctuation process (109SGS075): While controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (109SGS076).

  Production symbol fluctuation stop process (109SGS076): Based on the reception of the production control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing the stop of all symbols, the control of deriving and displaying the variation of the production symbol and displaying the display result (stop symbol) To do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (109SGS077), the small hit display process (109SGS080) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073).

  Big hit display processing (109SGS077): control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit on the image display device 5 after the change time ends. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process (109SGS078).

  Big hit game processing (109SGS078): The big hit game is controlled. For example, when the command for opening the special winning opening or the command for specifying after opening the special winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit ending effect process (109SGS079).

  Big hit end effect processing (109SGS079): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073).

  Small hit display processing (109SGS080): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the image display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting game process (109SGS081).

  Small hitting game processing (109SGS081): The small hitting game is controlled. For example, when the command for opening the special winning opening or the command for specifying after opening the special winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (109SGS082).

  Small hit end effect processing (109SGS082): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073) or the big hit display process (109SGS077).

  In the present embodiment, when the above-described first start winning effect is executed, the variable display is ended and a new variable display is started during execution of the first starting winning effect, so that the first reserved memory is executed. The number of held displays displayed in the display area 109SG005D may change (decrease). In such a case, as shown in FIGS. 20-28 (A) to 20-28 (E), the destination (stop position) in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the hold display of the first start winning effect object is displayed. ), The first start winning effect may be continued.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28 (A) to 20-28 (E), the variation display is ended and a new variation display is started during execution of the first start winning effect toward the hold 4 display position. When the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D is shifted based on the fact that the first hold storage display area 109SG005D If the hold display is no longer displayed at the hold 3 display position), after re-determining the destination in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the hold display for the first start winning effect to the hold 3 display position, 1 Start winning prize production should be continued.

  In addition, during a specific effect that suggests that the variable display result is a big hit, such as a reach effect while the super reach is changing, the player can be focused on the reach effect by executing the first start winning effect. It's gone. Therefore, in the hold effect process according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and 20-29 (B), during execution of a particular effect such as during reach effect during super reach change, When a new start winning is generated at the 1 start winning opening, the first starting winning effect is not executed and only the new holding display is additionally displayed in the first holding storage display area 109SG005D. It is possible to prevent the attraction of the reach production from being deteriorated by the 1-start winning presentation.

(Modification 1)
It should be noted that in the present embodiment, a mode in which the first start winning effect and the second starting winning effect are executed as the appearance display in the present invention has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first modification. As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), if a new starting winning is generated while the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, the hold display without performing a 2 start winning effect may be displayed on the active display area 109S G 005F as an active display, also, as a second start winning effect, first hold store displays the hold display from the character image 109SGC It may be directly moved to the active display area 109SG005F without passing through the area 109SG005D. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period from the generation of a new start winning until the active display is displayed in the active display area 109SG005F.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the white circle-shaped hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes (for example, a blue circle, a red circle, a white triangle, a white quadrangle, etc.) are provided as the display modes of these hold displays, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed. Thus, a hold change effect may be executed that suggests a ratio (big hit expectation) at which the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display corresponding to each hold display.

(Modification 2)
In addition, when the big hit expectation degree is changed according to the display mode of the hold display as described above, the display mode of the hold display of the first start winning effect effect may be changed during the first start winning effect effect. Specifically, as a second modification, as shown in FIGS. 20-31 (A) to 20-31 (D), a movable body is provided on the side of the image display device 5, and the first start winning effect is being executed. By disposing the movable body on the movement path of the hold display, the hold display is hidden from the player. Then, by changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment, the change of the display mode of the hold display during the first start winning effect (from the white display in a circle to the white star shown in FIG. 20-31 (D)) Display 109SG005H1) may be realized. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the display mode of the hold display of the first start winning effect object changes, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the second modification, the movable display hides the hold display of the first start winning effect object, and the display mode of the hold display is changed during the hiding, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 20-32 (A) to 20-32 (D), the hold display of the first start winning effect object is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the movable body. 20H (character image 109SG005G shown in FIG. 20-32C) is concealed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed during the concealment to change the display mode of the hold display during the first start winning effect (circle). 20-32 (D) to a rectangular white display 109SG005H2) may be realized.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the present embodiment, the form in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The change of the setting value of may be executable during the game. When changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game, as shown in FIGS. 20-33 (A) to 20-33 (C) as a modified example 3, for example, first, a clerk of a game hall After opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the lock switch 109SG0051 is turned on to display the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor (first display unit 109SG029A), and then the gaming machine A store clerk or the like in the field operates the setting changeover switch 109SG052 to change the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 109SG029A.

  Then, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade pushes the lock switch 109SG051 to set the numerical value (setting value) displayed on the first display unit 109SG029A as a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 and back up the RAM 102. It may be stored in the area. In addition, after the new setting value is set, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, special figure reservation storage, general figure reservation storage, game control flag setting section 109SG152, game control timer setting section 109SG153, Various flags and data stored in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 and the like may be deleted.

  In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, a pending storage in which the variable display result becomes a big hit newly occurs due to the change of the set value, and the variable winning ball device 6B is newly added. It is possible to prevent the fact that it is released (a common figure hit occurs) and the variable display result during execution becomes an unreasonable big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, the special winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the variable winning ball device 6B is open. It is possible to prevent the player from getting an inappropriate profit. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being erased even though the new setting value is not set.

  In addition, in the third modified example, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is thus played during the game. When the set value of the machine 1 can be changed, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the LED, etc. are detected based on the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 by the frame opening detection sensor (not shown). Thus, an opening notification means capable of notifying that the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is being opened may be provided to prevent the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being illegally changed.

  Further, when the opening notification means is provided in this way, it is determined whether or not the pending storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and the game control data holding area 109SG150 is determined. When the pending storage is stored in, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from the case where the pending storage is not stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened to change the set value, it is easy to determine whether or not the pending storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 according to the notification mode of the notification means. Since it can be recognized by the clerk at the game arcade, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being inappropriately changed.

  Furthermore, in the third modification, when the opening notification means is provided in this way, whether or not there is a pending storage in which the variable display result is a big hit in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003. When it is determined that there is a pending storage that causes the variable display result to be a big hit, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from that when it is determined that there is no pending storage that causes the variable display result to be a big hit. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, it becomes possible for a clerk or the like in the amusement hall to easily recognize whether or not there is a pending storage that causes a big change display result. It is possible to prevent the value from being changed.

  Further, as in the third modification, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game, and the display mode of the hold display is changed from a white circle to the white circle as in the second modification. When it is possible to change to a white triangle or quadrangle with a higher expectation than a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a pending display displayed with a white triangle or quadrangle while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, When it is determined that there is a hold display displayed as a white triangle or a quadrangle, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from that when there is no hold display displayed as a white triangle or a quadrangle. By doing this, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the fact that the hold display is displayed as a white triangle or a quadrangle with a higher expectation for a big hit than a white round shape is indicated by a clerk at the game hall. And the like can be easily recognized, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from being inappropriately changed.

  In addition, in the third modification, an example is shown in which the pending storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pending storage may be cleared even when the set value that was originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset.

  Further, in the third modification, a mode in which the pending storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), the timing at which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, the pending storage is performed when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. You may clear it. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from not being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the third modified example, the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening 109SG712 are closed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), the timing at which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, set by the CPU 103. The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening 109SG712 may be closed when the changing process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from not being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the third modification, when there is a pending storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, an example is shown in which the notification means executes the notification. The invention is not limited to this, and if there is a pending storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, even if a new set value cannot be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, a new setting value may not be easily set by providing a more complicated change procedure than when there is no pending storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being accidentally cleared by setting a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Modification 4)
In addition, in this embodiment, the display monitor 109SG029 is provided with five display portions from the first display portion 109SG029A to the fifth display portion 109SG029E, and the second display portion 109SG029B to the fifth display portion 109SG029E are provided in the first display portion 109SG029A. Although the form in which the continuous ratio, the winning combination ratio, and the set value of the base are displayed is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 4 shown in FIG. The display monitor does not have to be provided with a display section for displaying the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the set value of the base being displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the continuous ratio at the set value 1, the winning combination, the base is red, the continuous ratio at the set value 2, the winning ratio, the base is green, By displaying the ratio, the ratio, and the base in blue in the set value 3, it is possible to grasp which of the set values the ratio, the ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. May be easier.

  Further, in the present embodiment and the fourth modified example, on the display monitor 109SG029, it is possible to switch and display the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base at the setting value 1 every 5 seconds, and the operation of the display changeover switch 109SG030. For each of these, the consecutive ratio at the setting value 1, the winning combination, and the switching display of the base at 5 second intervals are displayed as the consecutive ratio at the setting value 2, the winning combination, the switching display of the base at 5 seconds intervals, the consecutive ratio at the setting value 3, Although a mode in which the winning ratio and the base can be switched and displayed at 5-second intervals has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the continuous ratio at the set value 1 and the continuous ratio at the set value 2, Switching display of continuous ratio at setting value 3 at 5 second intervals, switching display of combination ratio at setting value 1, setting ratio 2 and combination ratio at setting value 3 at 5 second intervals, and switching display at setting value 1 Base, set value In the base, and a switching display in 5 second intervals of the base in the setting value 3, it may be switched for each operation of the display switch 109SG030 a.

(Modification 5)
In this embodiment, the security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 109SG001a, but the invention is not limited to this. The security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 109SG003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 5, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), a security cover 109SG500B including a short piece 109SG500Ba and a long piece 109SG500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 109SG201. The right end of the long piece 109SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. It is provided so that it can be moved.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 109SG201 to lock it through the through hole 109SG500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 109SG500Bb. The switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500B (long piece 109SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 109SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to the. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 109SG201 to release the state in which the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 109SG500B from the substrate case 109SG201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 109SG500B with respect to the board case 109SG201, the projecting dimension of the security cover 109SG500B from the board case 109SG201 is extended to the length L2. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 109SG500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 109SG201. By sliding the board case 109SG201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 to perform the pachinko game. The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the security cover 109SG500B is mounted on the board case 109SG201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 109SG201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500B comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 109SG001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003. Has become.

  For this reason, in this modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 109SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, and therefore the lock switch 109SG051 is set by the security cover 109SG500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and to improve the security.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 109SG001a and the gaming machine frame 109SG003 to restrict the movement from the covering position to the left and right. However, the security cover 109SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the state where the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are covered by the security cover 109SG500B is maintained. .

(Modification 6)
Furthermore, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 109SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-37 (A) and 20-38 (B) as a modified example 6, the left end portion of the security cover 109SG500C is a gaming machine. A cover position covering the right side portion of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 and a pivot position from the cover position centered on a pivot 109SG500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 109SG003 and directed vertically. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the covering release position. In such a case, when closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ca is locked to the locking portion 109SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 109SG001a, and the long piece 109SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 109SG051. Rotation from the state in which the switch 109SG052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

  Then, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500C is rotated around the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 109SG201, whereby the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are formed. It suffices to release the covered state so that it can be operated. That is, in the sixth modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted while the security cover 109SG500C (long piece 109SG500Cb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500C is rotated around the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 109SG201 to turn the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (A), the security cover 109SG500C in Modification 6 rotates around the pivot 109SG500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowed state), thereby A store clerk or the like can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (B), the security cover 109SG500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 109SG500C causes a lock switch. Unless the 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500C abuts on the front end portion of the outer frame 109SG001a, and the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Is impossible.

  For this reason, in this modification 6, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 109SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the security cover 109SG500C and the lock switch 109SG051 are set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, thereby improving the security.

(Modification 7)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 109SG003a. In addition, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 109SG003a in this way, a modified example 7 is shown in FIGS. 20-39 (A) to 20-39 (C). As described above, the through hole 109SG003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 can be operated via the through hole 109SG003b.

  When the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 can be operated via the through hole 109SG003b in this way, a door body 109SG003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 109SG003b is provided, and the door body 109SG003c is closed. The operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-39 (C), when the door body 109SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 109SG003a. Since 109SG003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 109SG003a and the gaming machine frame 109SG003 so as to be openable and closable, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 2 of this embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 2 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in a gaming machine whose setting values can be changed like the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, setting information (setting values of both the RAM 102 on the main board 11 side and the RAM 122 on the effect control board 12 side) It is conceivable to store the value). However, in such a case, when the setting information is stored in the RAM 122 without any processing, or when a command including the setting information that is not processed is output from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12, a pachinko game machine is used. When the set value of 1 is "1" and when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "3", the contents of the RAM 122 and the command output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 are compared. As a result, the set value is easily analyzed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 converts the set value into a set secret value described later, outputs a command including the set secret value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120, By converting the setting value specified from the command into a setting corresponding value to be described later and storing the setting value, it is difficult to specify the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Hereinafter, the characteristic part 2 in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-40, as a production control command, a setting value designating command for designating a setting value (new changed setting value) stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 ( Command D1XXH) is provided. In the setting value designation command, different EXT data is set according to the setting secret value after changing the setting value.

  Further, in the setting value changing process (see FIG. 20-21), the CPU 103 executes the setting value conversion process for changing the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 to the setting secret value. In the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41, the CPU 103 first specifies a new setting value (setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) (109SGS301). Next, the CPU 103 converts the specified setting value into a setting value confidential value (109SGS302).

  In the processing of 109SGS302, the CPU 103 may convert the specified setting value into a secret value using a conversion table as shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) or FIG. 20-42 (2), for example. .. 20-42 (1) is a diagram showing the conversion table A in which a value of 1 having no regularity is set for each set value. When converting the set value to the secret value using the conversion table A, for example, when the set value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is “1”, the set value is converted to the set secret value “150”. , 109SGS301 if the set value specified in the process is “2”, the set value is converted to the set secret value “41”, and if the set value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is “3”, the set value is Is converted to the set confidential value “34”.

  20-42 (2) is a diagram showing the conversion table B in which a value of 1 having a specific regularity is set for each set value. When converting the setting value to the setting confidential value using the conversion table B, for example, when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the setting confidential value “4”. If the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “2”, the setting value is converted into the set confidential value “5”, and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”, the setting value is set to “3”. The value is converted to the set confidential value “6”. That is, the conversion table B is a conversion table in which a value obtained by adding “3” to the setting value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 is the set confidential value.

  When the setting value is converted into the setting confidential value using the conversion table A in the process of 110SG302, the setting confidential value is converted into a value having no regularity (setting confidential value) for each setting value. It is possible to make it difficult to analyze and falsify the set value (the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) when the included set value designation command is output to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, when the setting value is converted into the set confidential value using the conversion table B in the process of 109SGS302, each set value is converted into a value having restriction (set confidential value). It is possible to reduce the processing load when the setting value is specified from the setting value confidential value in the update processing (see FIG. 20-45).

  In addition, in the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (3), the specified setting value is converted into a predetermined conversion coefficient (for example, the common multiple of the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”). It is also possible to execute arithmetic conversion in which a value obtained by multiplication (operation A) or division (operation B) by a certain "6" or "12" etc. is the set secret value.

  Further, in the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (4), a numerical value shift in which a value obtained by adding (shifting A) or subtracting (shifting B) a predetermined numerical value to the specified setting value is set as a confidential value. The conversion may be performed.

  In the numerical value shift conversion in the shift A, for example, when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is “1”, the setting value is converted into the set confidential value “12”, and the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is converted. If the setting value is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting confidential value "13", and if the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value is converted to the setting confidential value "14". That is, a value obtained by shifting the set value by +11 may be set as the set secret value. In the numerical value shift conversion in shift B, for example, when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the set confidential value “0”, and the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301. If the setting value is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting confidential value "1", and if the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value is converted to the setting confidential value "2". That is, a value obtained by shifting the set value by -1 may be set as the set secret value.

  Further, in the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (4), among the consecutive 8-digit bits (00000000), the bit corresponding to the specified setting value is turned on (changed from 0 to 1). ) You may perform the bit position conversion which makes a value a set value concealed value. Specifically, when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "1", the setting value is converted to the set confidential value "00000001", and the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "2". May convert the set value to the set confidential value “00000001”, and if the set value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is “3”, the set value may be converted to the set confidential value “00000100” (position A), if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "1", the setting value is converted into the set confidential value "10000000", and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "2", The setting value is converted into the setting confidential value “01000000”, and the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”. Some cases may be converted to a set confidential value set value "00100000" (Position B).

  As described above, in the process of 109SGS302, after the setting value is converted into the setting confidential value by any method shown in FIG. 20-42, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the setting value specifying command including the converted setting confidential value. Then, the setting value conversion process ends (S109SGS303). The setting value designation command for which the transmission setting is performed in S109SGS303 is output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (S27). The setting value conversion process is executed at the timing when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade pushes the lock switch 109SG051, as shown in FIG. 20-43, that is, when the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. do it.

  Next, an aspect in the case where the effect control board 12 receives the setting value designation command will be described. 20-44 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 20-44, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer, and thereby receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15. It is determined whether or not there is a command (109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

  When there is a received command in 109SGS221 (109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening winning award designation command, for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command (109SGS222). ). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning award designation command (109SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (109SGS223). For example, in the process of 109SGS223, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit. ..

  When the received command is not the first starting mouth winning designation command in 109SGS222 (109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting mouth winning designation command (109SGS224). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning award designation command (109SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (109SGS225). For example, in the processing of 109SGS225, the command reception control timer may be set to a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second reserved storage number notification command.

  When the received command in 109SGS224 is not the second start opening winning award designation command (109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (109SGS226). When the received command is not a symbol designating command in 109SGS226 (109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (109SGS227). When the received command is not the variable category command in 109SGS227 (109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (109SGS228). When it is the first reserved storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (109SGS229).

  When the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in 109SGS228 (109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (109SGS230). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (109SGS230; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (109SGS231).

  After executing any of the processes of 109SGS229 and 109SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undecided (109SGS232).

  If the received command at 109SGS226 is a symbol designating command (109SGS226; Y), if the received command at 109SGS227 is a variable category command (S227; Y), or one of the processes of 109SGS223, 109SGS225, 109SGS232 is executed. After that, the received command is stored at the head of the free area in the start winning command buffer 194A (not shown) (109SGS233), and the process returns to 109SGS221.

  In addition, when the fluctuation start command (the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command) and the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are received, the pending storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning time reception command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in 109SGS230 (109SGS230; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the setting value designation command (109SGS232). If the received command is a set value designation command (109SGS232; Y), a set value update process of storing the set value identified from the set value designation command in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is executed (S109SGS233). ), And returns to 109SGS21. If the received command is not the setting value designation command in 109SGS232 (109SGS232; N), the setting is performed according to the other received command (109SGS234), and the process returns to 109SGS221.

  20-45 is a flowchart showing the setting value updating process in the command analysis process. In the set value update processing, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the set value (the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) from the received set value designation command (110SGS311). In the process of 110SGS311, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the setting secret value from the received setting value designation command, and in the method corresponding to the method in which the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting value secret value, the setting value The set value may be specified from the secret value.

  For example, when the CPU 103 uses the conversion table A to convert the setting value into the setting confidential value, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value designation command is “150”, the setting value is specified as “1”, If the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is "41", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is "34", the setting value is "3". You can specify Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value using the conversion table B, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value designation command is “4”, the setting value is specified as “1”, If the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is "5", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6", the setting value is "3". You can specify

  Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value by using the operation A as the arithmetic conversion, the value obtained by dividing the setting confidential value specified by the setting value designation command by the predetermined conversion coefficient is specified as the setting value. Good. Further, when the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the calculation B as the calculation conversion, the value obtained by multiplying the set secret value specified by the set value designation command by the predetermined conversion coefficient is specified as the set value. Good.

  Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value by using the shift A as the numerical value shift conversion, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value designation command is “12”, the setting value is specified as “1”. However, if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is “13”, the setting value is specified as “2”, and if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is “14”, the setting value is “ 3 ”. Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value using shift B as the numerical value shift conversion, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value designation command is “0”, the setting value is specified as “1”. However, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value specifying command is “1”, the setting value is specified to “2”, and if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value specifying command is “2”, the setting value is “ 3 ”.

  Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value using the position A as the bit position conversion, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value designation command is “00000001”, the setting value is specified as “1”. However, if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is “00000010”, the setting value is specified as “2”, and if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value specifying command is “00000100”, the setting value is set as “0000”. 3 ”. Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value by using the position B as the bit position conversion, if the setting confidential value specified from the setting value designation command is “10000000”, the setting value is specified as “1”. However, if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value designation command is “01000000”, the setting value is specified as “2”, and if the setting confidential value specified by the setting value designation command is “00100000”, the setting value is “ 3 ”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified in 110SGS311 into one setting corresponding value corresponding to the specified setting value (110SGS312), and converts the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 into the converted setting corresponding value. The value is updated and stored, and the setting value update process ends (110SGS313).

  In the processing of 110SGS312 and 110SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 uses the conversion table shown in FIG. 20-42, operation conversion, numerical value shift conversion, bit position conversion, etc. to set the set value as the set secret value. It may be converted into a different value (setting corresponding value) and updated and stored in the RAM 122. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 converts the set value specified from the set value designation command received from the main board 11 into a set corresponding value without updating and storing the set value or the set concealed value in the RAM 122. Then, by updating and storing in the RAM 122, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is analyzed and that the value different from the set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122.

  It should be noted that the method by which the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value into the setting corresponding value in 110SGS312 may be the same as the method by which the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing. , May be different.

  Further, when the value (setting corresponding value) corresponding to the set setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 in this way, the effect control CPU 120 does not change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the change. It is possible to execute a set value suggesting effect that suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a predetermined period (for example, until the variable display is executed 100 times or until one hour elapses). Good. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-46, according to the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period described above. A morning background effect (setting value suggestion effect) may be executed in which spring, summer, and winter background images are displayed at different rates as background images.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the image to be displayed as the background image on the image display device 5 as the set value suggesting effect is spring, summer, or winter after the power source is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, when the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the image displayed as the background image is a winter image at a rate of 80%. Then, the image of spring is determined at a rate of 15%, and the image of summer is determined at a rate of 5%. When the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is the value corresponding to the setting value “2”, the image displayed as the background image is determined to be the winter image at a rate of 60% and the image at a rate of 30%. The image of spring is decided, and the image of summer is decided at a rate of 10%. Then, when the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is the value corresponding to the setting value “3”, the image to be displayed as the background image is determined to be the winter image at a rate of 40%, and is set at a rate of 45%. The image of spring is decided, and the image of summer is decided at a rate of 15%.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player and the setting value 3 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. From the time until the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5 is made different as the set value suggesting effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value suggesting As an effect, a pachinko game is displayed by displaying a specific character, dialogue, or the like on the image display device 5 during variable display, during big hit game, end timing of big hit game, during variable display after a certain number of times (for example, 500 times), etc. It may be an effect that suggests the set value set in the machine 1. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value suggestion effect is executed until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value suggestion effect may be an effect that can be executed regardless of the period after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 converts the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a set secret value by using a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, or the like in the set value conversion processing. Although the form of conversion is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the setting value conversion processing, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are converted into these conversion tables, arithmetic conversion, and numerical shift conversion. The setting secret value may be converted using a method other than the bit position conversion, or the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be converted into the setting secret value using two or more methods.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 uses the conversion table, the arithmetic conversion, the numerical value shift conversion, the bit position conversion, or the like in the setting value update processing to set the setting value specified from the setting value designation command. Although the form of converting to the setting corresponding value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the setting value updating process, the setting value specified from the setting value designation command is converted into these conversion tables or calculation conversions. , May be converted into the setting corresponding value by using a method other than the numerical value shift conversion or the bit position conversion, or the setting value specified by the setting value designation command may be converted into the setting corresponding value by using two or more methods. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 outputs a set value designation command including a set secret value obtained by converting the set value to the effect control board 12. However, the effect control CPU 120 has exemplified the form in which the setting value specified from the setting value designation command is converted into the setting corresponding value and stored in the RAM 122, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachinko gaming machine. When a new setting value is set to 1, only one of the conversion of the setting value by the CPU 103 into the setting concealed value and the conversion of the setting value by the effect control CPU 120 into the setting corresponding value is executed. Good. When the CPU 103 does not convert the set value into the set confidential value, the CPU 103 outputs a set value specifying command including the set value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value. The setting value specified from the command may be converted into the setting corresponding value and stored in the RAM 122. When the effect control CPU 120 does not change the set value to the corresponding value, the CPU 103 outputs a set value designation command including the set concealed value obtained by converting the set value to the effect control board 12 to produce the effect. The control CPU 120 may store the setting value specified from the setting value designation command in the RAM 122 as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. It is possible to execute the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as a suggested production, and when performing the reach production of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the reach of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or super reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, displaying enemy characters or enemies) is displayed in a mode related to the title subsequently notified. Execution of an effect that suggests a character improves the effect of the effect and allows the player to pay attention to the effect.

Further, the present invention also includes the following second invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value specifying command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to the effect control board that performs the effect, and the setting value is sent to the effect control board. It is configured to notify and control the setting suggestion effect, and the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects controls the progress of the game by being a board that controls the effect rather than controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to remove the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered with, an inappropriate setting suggestion effect will be given. There was the problem of being afraid to end up. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing shown in FIG. 20-21);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
Effect control means for controlling effect based on control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 executes morning morning background effect (setting value suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 20-46). When,
Equipped with
The game control means, as the control information capable of specifying the setting value, setting value control information including a secret value which is a numerical value different from the setting value set by the setting means and which has been converted from the setting value (for example, , A setting value designation command) can be transmitted (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the command control processing (S27) after the processing of 110SG303 of the setting value conversion processing),
The effect control means stores a secret value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 110SG313 of the set value update processing shown in FIG. 20-45. Along with the execution part), it is possible to execute an effect related to the set value specified from the secret value (for example, until 1 hour has elapsed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, or a variable display was executed 100 times. Until the morning is performed, the background performance (setting value suggestion performance) is executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored setting value from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by using a conversion table in which the setting value and the secret value are associated with each other (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103). 20-42 (1) and the conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42 (2) to convert the set value into the set secret value).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the conversion processing load.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by performing a calculation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value (for example, in the process of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, 20-42 (3) (Operation A (Operation A or Operation B) is used to convert the set value to the set secret value)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity necessary for conversion.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the setting value to 1 (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. -42 (5) Bit position conversion (position A or position B) is used to convert a set value to a set secret value)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity necessary for conversion.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number (for example, in the process of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4)). The part that converts the set value to the set secret value using the numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity necessary for conversion.

Further, the present invention also includes a third invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value specifying command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to the effect control board that performs the effect, and the setting value is sent to the effect control board. It is configured to notify and control the setting suggestion effect, and the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects controls the progress of the game by being a board that controls the effect rather than controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to remove the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered with, an inappropriate setting suggestion effect will be given. There was the problem of being afraid to end up. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing shown in FIG. 20-21);
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
An effect control unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) that controls the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control unit,
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit set value control information (for example, a set value designation command) including the set value as the control information (for example, the CPU 103 executes a command after executing 110SG303 of the set value conversion process). Part that executes the control process (S27)),
The effect control unit converts the set value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control unit into a secret value that is a numerical value different from the set value and stores the secret value (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). In the processing of 110SG313 of the setting value update processing shown in FIG. 20-45, the setting value specified from the setting value specification command is converted into a setting corresponding value and stored, and the setting value specified from the stored secret value Related effects can be executed (for example, a background effect (setting value suggestion effect) is provided in the morning until one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or until 100 variable displays have been executed. Part to be executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored setting value from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by using a conversion table in which the setting value and the secret value are associated with each other (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103). 20-42 (1) and the conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42 (2) to convert the set value into the set secret value).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the conversion processing load.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by performing a calculation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value (for example, in the process of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, 20-42 (3) (Operation A (Operation A or Operation B) is used to convert the set value to the set secret value)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity necessary for conversion.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the setting value to 1 (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. -42 (5) Bit position conversion (position A or position B) is used to convert a set value to a set secret value)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity necessary for conversion.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number (for example, in the process of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4)). The part that converts the set value to the set secret value using the numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with while reducing the data capacity necessary for conversion.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Be done.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 that can open and close the opening of the outer frame 109SG001a and the glass door frame 109SG003a that can open and close the front surface of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 are used as the opening and closing body has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door or the like capable of opening and closing the front opening of the housing like a slot machine. Further, not only the one that can be opened and closed by rotating, but also the one that can be opened and closed by sliding or attaching and detaching.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are applied as the operation unit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are not limited to this. Only one of them may be used, or another operation unit such as another switch, button, lever, dial, touch sensor or the like having a different operation mode (eg, pulling operation, pushing operation, rotating operation, etc.) may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the security covers 109SG500A, 109SG500B, 109SG500C are applied as the restricting member has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation portion is formed by such a plate-like member. Even if it is not a covering member, the shape, size, material and the like can be variously changed as long as the member can regulate the operation of the operation unit. Specifically, for example, the operation unit may not be covered, but the operation unit may be restricted by contacting the operation unit.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security covers 109SG500A, 109SG500B, and 109SG500C as the restricting member may be in an inoperable state by covering the operating portion in the restricted state of the operating portion, and are not necessarily in the inoperable state. Does not have to be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the setting switching main body portion having the operation portion such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main substrate 11 may be provided on a separate substrate, may be housed in a case other than the substrate case 109SG201, or may not be housed in the substrate case 109SG201.

  In Modifications 5 and 6 described above, the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C as the restricting members exemplify a configuration in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 cannot be closed in the uncovered position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003, for example, an interlocking mechanism or the like that interlocks according to the closing operation of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is provided so that the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C return from the uncovering position to the covering position. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the board case 109SG201 provided with the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is provided at a position where it is difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, a place other than the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a glass door frame on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 109SG003). It may be provided at a position closed by 109SG003a or at the outer frame 109SG001a).

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to change the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 105SG051 are ON (setting change processing However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be performed depending on the combination of ON / OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (the setting confirmation process is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, the recovery process from the power interruption (recovery process shown in FIG. 3) You can execute In addition, during the execution of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process described above, the variation display of the special symbol, the launch of the game ball, whether the variation display result is a big hit, various lottery such as big hit type, payout of prize balls, etc. It suffices if the game is stopped without executing any processing.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and according to the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which winning is possible.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 57SH)
[First Embodiment of Characteristic Section 57SH]
Next, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine including the characteristic portion 57SH of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine including a characteristic part. As shown in FIG. 21-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a sub image display device 57SH51. The sub-image display device 57SH51 is fixed, for example, near the image display device 5. The sub-image display device 57SH51 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device (sub-liquid crystal). The screen of the sub-image display device 57SH51 is smaller than that of the image display device 5, and is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the image display device 5. The sub-image display device 57SH51 may be a display device other than the liquid crystal display device. The sub image display device 57SH51 may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub-image display device 57SH51 is fixed near the image display device 5 or the like, but may be a movable type or a retractable type.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 directs the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying an image on the image display device 5 or the sub-image display device 57SH51. In addition, the production of the game is also performed by outputting a sound from the speaker 8 (8L, 8R) or turning on / blinking the game effect lamp 9. A plurality of reproduction channels for the sound emitted from the speaker 8 are provided. For example, the sound corresponding to the display of the image display device 5 is output from the first sound output channel, and the sound corresponding to the display of the sub image display device 57SH51 is It is output from the second sound output channel. The sound output from the first sound output channel is output to the side closer to the image display device 5 from the right speaker 8R. On the other hand, the sound output from the second sound output channel is output from the left speaker 8L on the side closer to the sub image display device 57SH51.

  In the pachinko game machine 1, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the special drawing game, it becomes a "big hit", but various effects such as a notice effect and a reach effect are executed before displaying whether or not the big hit occurs. By doing so, the special figure game is excited. These notice effect and reach effect are executed using the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 57SH51.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a treasure box effect can be executed as one of the notice effects. In the treasure box production, the treasure box is displayed, the treasure box is opened, and the contents (characters) of the treasure box are displayed. The contents of the treasure box are characters displayed on the image display device 5, and give advance notice (indication) of effects and the like to be executed thereafter according to the displayed characters.

  As an effect to be announced in advance in the treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), the hold effect effect, the zone effect, the pseudo effect effect, the reach effect, and the reach effect of the super reach (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach effect"). , And a big hit notification effect (fanfare effect). Among these, the image display device 5 can execute the notice of the pseudo continuous production, the reach production, the SP reach production, and the big hit notification production. Further, the notice of the pending change effect, the zone effect, and the reach effect can be executed on the sub-image display device 57SH51. In the following description, the image display device 5 may be referred to as a “main liquid crystal 5” and the sub image display device 57SH51 may be referred to as a “sub liquid crystal 57SH51” in order to compare and explain the two display devices. In addition, since the jackpot notification effect is executed when the jackpot state is started, the treasure box effect practically also gives notice (execution) of the jackpot state.

  In the treasure box production, SP reach is executed when the look-ahead notice production is executed, SP reach is executed when the result of the special drawing game is lost, and is executed when the result of the special drawing game is a big hit. There is. Hereinafter, the treasure box effect when the look-ahead notice effect is executed is "pre-read treasure box effect", and the treasure box effect that is executed when the SP reach is executed and the result of the special drawing game is "SP reach lose treasure box effect", The treasure box effect executed when SP reach is executed and the result of the special figure game is a big hit is also referred to as "SP reach big hit treasure box effect".

  The pending change effect and the zone effect are effects that are executed as a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended), and for the variable display that has not yet started. It is executed according to the result of the prefetch determination. The variable display that has not started yet is also referred to as a prefetch target. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach effect, and the SP reach effect are preview effects that give advance notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The big hit notification effect is an effect of notifying the start of the big hit state.

  In the treasure box effect, when the pending change effect is announced, an effect in which the character “change!” Pops out from the treasure box is executed. When the zone effect is announced, the characters "SPECIAL!", When the pseudo continuous effect is announced, the character "Continue", and when the reach effect is announced, the character "Chance!" , When the SP reach effect is foretold, the characters “Gekiatsu!” And for the jackpot notification effect, the characters “Congratulations!” Pop out.

  The hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 changes. The zone effect is an effect of shifting to a zone (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes. As the zone effect, there may be a plurality of types of effects having different background images and effect modes. In the pseudo continuous production, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is restarted during the variable display of the decorative pattern, so that one variable display can be simulated like a plurality of variable displays. .. The treasure box effect can be executed when the look-ahead notice effect is executed and when the SP reach effect is executed.

  The treasure box effect may be executed when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the SP reach effect is not executed. For example, the treasure box effect may be executed when the reach effect of the normal reach is executed instead of the look-ahead notice effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic portion 57SH, the SP reach effect is always executed when the treasure box effect is executed, but by including the case where the SP reach is not executed, the joy when the SP reach is executed is increased. can do. In addition, a treasure box presentation without an announcement or the like may be performed. In the treasure box production without the noticed production or the like, the production without the contents may be performed even if the treasure box is opened and smoke is generated.

  FIG. 21-2 (B) is a diagram for explaining the execution ratio of the treasure box effect. As shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), the look-ahead treasure box effect is executed at a rate of 80% of the case where the look-ahead notice effect is executed. Further, the SP reach lost treasure box effect is executed at 50% of the case where the SP reach effect is executed and the result of the special figure game is “miss”. The SP reach big hit treasure box effect is executed 90% of the time when the SP reach effect is executed and the result of the special figure game is "big hit". When the SP reach effect is executed, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the treasure box effect is not executed more than once in one variable display.

  In the look-ahead treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 announces the pending change effect at a rate of 70% and the zone effect at a rate of 30%. In the SP reach loss treasure box production, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (D), in the main liquid crystal 5, a pseudo continuous production is announced at a rate of 40%, a reach production is announced at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 10%. The SP reach effect is foretold, and the reach effect is announced at a rate of 10% on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. In the SP reach jackpot treasure box production, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), in the main liquid crystal 5, a pseudo continuous production is announced at a rate of 10%, a reach production is announced at a rate of 20%, and 35%. The SP reach effect is announced at a rate, the jackpot notification effect is announced at a rate of 5%, and the reach effect is announced at a rate of 30% on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51.

  Next, a procedure of the treasure box effect determination processing of the characteristic portion 57SH will be described. FIG. 21C is a flowchart showing an example of the treasure box effect determination process of the characteristic part 57SH. As shown in FIG. 21C, in the treasure box effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 57SHS10). In addition, the variation pattern designation command corresponds to the variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. It is a command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as an effect pattern that is variably displayed, is determined by the main board 11, and is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the variation pattern designation command includes a variation pattern designation command indicating "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "SP reach loss", "SP reach jackpot".

  When the variation pattern designation command has not been received (step 57SHS10: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the treasure box effect determination processing. When the variation pattern designation command is received (step 57 SHS10: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received variation pattern designation command is the "SP reach jackpot" variation pattern designation command. (Step 57SHS12).

  When the received variation pattern designation command is "SP reach jackpot" (step 57SHS12: YES), the effect control CPU 120, based on the treasure box effect execution ratio shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), SP reach jackpot treasure box effect. It is determined whether or not to execute (step 57SHS14).

  As a result, when the SP reach jackpot treasure box effect is executed (step 57SHS14: YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the SP reach jackpot treasure box effect content determination table shown in FIG. The content of the effect to be announced in advance in the treasure box effect is determined (step 57SHS16). If the received variation pattern designation command is not "SP reach jackpot" (step 57SHS12: NO), if the SP reach jackpot treasure box effect is not executed (step 57SHS14: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 57SHS18. ..

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern designation command of "SP reach lost" (step 57SHS18). When the received variation pattern designation command is “SP reach loss” (step 57 SHS18: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the SP reach loss treasure box effect based on the treasure box effect execution ratio shown in FIG. 21-2 (B). It is determined whether or not to perform (step 57SHS20).

  As a result, when executing the SP reach lost treasure box effect (step 57 SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the SP reach lost treasure box effect content determination table shown in FIG. The content of the effect to be announced is determined (step 57SHS22). If the received variation pattern designating command is not "SP reach loss" (step 57SHS18: NO), or if the SP reach loss treasure box effect is not executed (step 57SHS20: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 57SHS24.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a prefetch target (step 57SHS24). If there is a prefetch target (step 57SHS24: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the prefetch treasure box effect based on the treasure box effect execution ratio shown in FIG. 21-2 (B) (step 57SHS26). ).

  As a result, when the prefetch treasure box effect is executed (step 57SHS26: YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch treasure box effect content determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (step 57SHS28). Then, the treasure box effect determination process is ended. Further, when there is no prefetch target (step 57SHS24: NO) and when the prefetch treasure box effect is not executed (step 57SHS26: NO), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the treasure box effect determination process.

  Next, an example of the treasure box effect executed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 will be described. 21-4 and 21-5 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic portion 57SH. 21-4 and 21-5 show the display mode of the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 as the treasure box production progresses, and the sound output from the speaker 8 (right speaker 8R, left speaker 8L). ..

  21-4 shows an example of the treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and FIG. 21-5 shows an example of the treasure box 57SH10 in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. The following description will be made assuming that the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-4 is the first treasure box effect and the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-5 is the second treasure box effect. In addition, FIG. 21-6 shows a time chart of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. The first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect will be described with reference to this time chart as well.

  First, an example of the first treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 will be described. In the first treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. 21-2, the pseudo treasure effect, the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the big hit notification effect. For this reason, no advance notice (indication) is made for the pre-reading notice effect, that is, the pending change effect or the zone effect.

  As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the special drawing game is being executed, the decorative designs are variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the main liquid crystal 5. Further, at a lower position on the main liquid crystal 5, a hold display area 57SH52 is provided in which an image (hereinafter, referred to as "hold display") for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed in correspondence with the number of the hold storage information. ing. The hold display is displayed in a circular white color.

  In the hold display area 57SH52, the hold storage number is displayed in a format in which the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number are distinguished. For example, in the main liquid crystal 5, the first reserved storage number is displayed in the first reserved display area 57SH52A at the left end, and the second reserved storage number is displayed in the second reserved display area 57SH52B at the right end. By displaying the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area separately, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be easily distinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), three hold displays are displayed in the first hold display area 57SH52A of the hold display area 57SH52, and no hold display is displayed in the second hold display area 57SH52B. ..

  An active display area 57SH53 is provided at the center of the lower part of the main liquid crystal 5. In the active display area 57SH53, a variable correspondence display corresponding to the variable display is displayed during execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspended display that has been deleted (moved or shifted) from the suspended display area. The hold display area 57SH52 and the active display area 57SH53 may be arranged at any position in the display area of the main liquid crystal 5.

  While the decorative design is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the main liquid crystal 5 before the first treasure box presentation is started, the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a decorative character. Is displayed by. Since the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 is less visible than the main liquid crystal 5, the variable display can be easily noticed when the decorative design is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. It should be noted that the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 may display an image other than the decorative characters of the model name, a moving image may be displayed, or a still image may be displayed.

  Then, when the first time 57SHT11 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached, the first treasure box effect is started. In the first treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect is performed. In the first stage display of the first treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. At this time, on the main liquid crystal 5, a button image 57SH31B imitating the push button 31B is displayed in a still state together with the treasure box 57SH10. By displaying the button image 57SH31B, an operation instruction (operation instruction) of the push button 31B is given to the player. The button image 57SH31B may be displayed in a stationary state, or may be displayed in an operating state, for example, in a state of operating so as to move up and down. The button image 57SH31B is displayed until the operation valid period of the push button 31B elapses or the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B. The operation valid period of the push button 31B is from the first time 57SHT11 to the second time 57SHT12 shown in FIG. 21-6.

  While the button image 57SH31B is being displayed, a time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed below the button image 57SH31B to visually notify the operation valid time of the push button 31B. The time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed at the same time as the button image 57SH31B is displayed. The time gauge 57SH5TG is provided with a bar indicating the operation valid period, and displays a bar that becomes shorter as time passes. The time gauge 57SH5TG may not be displayed.

  While the bar of the time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C), when the player operates the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B, the treasure chest 57SH10 Is opened, and an image in which the contents wrapped in smoke pop out from the treasure chest 57SH10 is displayed. When the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened, a sound of “pa-ka” is output from the left speaker 8L, creating an atmosphere in which the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened. The contents 57SH11 that the treasure box 57SH10 has opened and popped out are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  Up to this point, the first stage display of the first treasure box effect is displayed. In the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect, unlike the first-stage display of the second treasure box effect, which will be described later, the appearance sound is not output from the speaker 8 as the first-stage special effect sound. In addition, the push button 31B becomes the second time 57SHT12 without being operated, and when the operation valid period elapses, the bar of the time gauge 57SH5TG disappears, the button image 57SH31B and the treasure chest 57SH10 also disappear, and the subsequent display is executed. The first treasure chest production ends. The second display 57SHT12 may be performed without the push sensor 35B detecting the operation of the push button 31B, and the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed.

  When the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period, when the second time 57SHT12 is reached, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased and the second stage display of the first treasure box effect is started. It When the second-stage display is started, this effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as a second-stage special effect sound. The effect sound is continuously output while the latter display of the first treasure box effect is displayed.

  In the latter stage display of the first treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21D, the content 57SH11 that has popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed. At this time, the treasure chest 57SH10 has been erased, but may remain displayed. Here, the character "CHANCE!" Is displayed as the content 57SH11. When the character "chance!" Is displayed, the sound "chance" is output from the left speaker 8L, which raises the expectation that the jackpot state will be executed. Further, while the first treasure box presentation shown in FIGS. 21-4 (B) to (D) is being executed, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed by the decorative characters on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51.

  By displaying the character "Chance!" On the main liquid crystal 5 as the content 57SH11, execution of the reach effect is foretold. Thereafter, when the third time 57SHT13 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached, the first treasure box presentation is ended. When the first treasure box effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (E), the same number as the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. Then, "7" is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5C continues to be variably displayed, the decorative design in the reach state is displayed, and the reach effect is executed. At this time, a sound "reach" is output from the left speaker 8L, and a decorative character "reach" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 to notify the start of the reach effect.

  Next, an example of the second treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 will be described. In the second treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, as shown in FIG. 21B, a notice (indication) about the pending change effect or the zone effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is mainly given. Further, in the second treasure box production, a pseudo-relational production is also announced (indicated), and productions other than the prefetching advance notice are also announced (indicated).

  As shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), when the special figure game is being executed, when the first time 57SHT11 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached, the second treasure box effect is started. When the second treasure box effect is started, a front-stage display of the second treasure box effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B). In the front display of the second treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. At this time, on the main liquid crystal 5, there is no large change, the decorative design is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the button image 57SH31B and the treasure chest 57SH10 as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B) are not displayed. .. When the second treasure box effect is started, the appearance sound is output from the right speaker 8R as the front special effect sound. The appearing sound is continuously output while the first-stage display of the second treasure box effect is being performed.

  Even if the push sensor 35B does not detect the operation of the push button 31B between the first time 57SHT11 and the second time 57SHT12, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C), the treasure chest 57SH10 opens, An image in which the content 57SH11 wrapped in smoke pops out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed. Here, while the treasure chest 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, the contents 57SH11 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. When the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened, the right speaker 8R outputs a sound of "pa-kappa", which creates an atmosphere in which the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened. The process up to this point is the front display of the second treasure box effect.

  At the second time 57SHT12, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased, and the second stage display of the second treasure box effect is started. When the second stage display of the second treasure box effect is started, the same effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as the second stage special effect sound as in the first treasure box effect. This effect sound is continuously output while the latter display of the second treasure box effect is displayed.

  In the latter stage display of the second treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (D), the content 57SH11 that has popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. Here, the characters "change!" Are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 as the contents 57SH11. At this time, the treasure box 57SH10 remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, but may be erased. When the character "Change!" Is displayed, the sound "Are?" Is output from the left speaker 8L, increasing the expectation for the change in the hold display. The opened treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 while the second treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) to (D) is being executed.

  By displaying the character “change!” As the content 57SH11 on the main liquid crystal 5, the execution of the pending change effect is foretold. After that, when the third time 57SHT13 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached, as shown in this notice, when the second treasure box presentation is completed, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (E), 3 in the hold display area 57SH52 of the main liquid crystal 5 is displayed. In the latest hold display among the two hold displays, that is, the hold display shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), the shape of the leftmost hold display changes from a circle to a star shape. Further, the color of the hold display changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect can be executed as the notice effect, and an effect or the like to be subsequently executed is announced in advance in these treasure box effects. .. Of these, in the first treasure box presentation, the main liquid crystal 5 displays the subsequent display after performing the previous display. Further, in the second treasure box presentation, the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 performs the former display and then displays the latter display. At this time, in the first treasure box effect, the latter display is displayed by operating the push button 31B, but in the second treasure box effect, the latter display is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated. Therefore, by changing the mode of the treasure box effect as the notice effect, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, in the first treasure box effect, the appearance sound as the first-stage special effect sound is not output when performing the first-stage display, but in the second treasure box production, when the first-stage display is performed. The appearance sound as the first-stage special effect sound is output. Therefore, by changing the mode of the treasure box effect as the notice effect, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect are not simultaneously executed in one variable display. Therefore, since the treasure chest 57SH10 and the contents 57SH11 are not displayed more than once in one variable display, the player can be less confused and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the characterizing portion 57SH, the treasure box effect is executed by the main liquid crystal 5. For this reason, the player can easily recognize the result of the production, and thus the interest can be improved. In particular, in the second treasure box presentation, the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 performs the front display, but the main liquid crystal 5 displays the rear display. Since the effect result of the treasure box effect is displayed in the latter stage display, by displaying the latter stage display on the main liquid crystal 5, the player can easily recognize the effect result.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH, the treasure box effect suggests effects other than the treasure box effect, for example, pending change effect, zone effect, simulated effect, reach effect, SP reach effect, and jackpot notification effect. There is. For this reason, variations suggested for effects other than the treasure box effect are increased, so that the interest can be improved.

  Further, in the first treasure box effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the big hit notification effect are suggested, and the pre-reading notice effect, that is, the pending change effect and the zone effect are not suggested. In addition, in the second treasure box production, a pending change production and a zone production, which are prefetching notice productions, are suggested. In this way, since the suggested effect is assigned according to the type of treasure box effect, the effect suggested by the type of treasure box effect is roughly specified, and thus the interest can be improved. Further, in the second treasure box production, a suggestion of a pseudo continuous production is also made. Therefore, for example, even if the second treasure box effect is executed, it can be expected to execute an effect other than the prefetching notice effect.

  In the first treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 and the contents 57SH11 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and the effect mainly proceeds on the main liquid crystal 5 located on the left side. In the second treasure box presentation, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, the contents 57SH11 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, the preceding display is mainly performed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 located on the right side, and the main liquid crystal 5 located on the left side. In, the latter display is mainly displayed. In the first treasure box presentation, sound is output from the left speaker 8L on the side closer to the main liquid crystal 5. Further, in the front display of the second treasure box effect, the sound is output from the right speaker 8R near the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, and in the rear display, the sound is output from the left speaker 8L near the main liquid crystal 5. In this way, in the treasure box effect, since the sound is mainly output from the speaker 8 on the side closer to the display device on which the image or the like is displayed, the display device on which the treasure box effect is displayed (the main liquid crystal 5 or the sub liquid crystal 57SH51). ), The player can be paid attention to, so that it is possible to make the treasure box effect easy to pay attention to and the interest can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the sound related to the treasure box effect is output from either the right speaker 8R or the left speaker 8L, the speaker that does not output the sound related to the treasure box effect does not output the sound related to the treasure box effect and outputs a sound other than the sound related to the treasure box effect. Can output sound. Therefore, for example, when a different effect is executed at the same timing as the treasure box effect and the effect is a sound effect, the sound of the effect can be output from the speaker that does not output the sound related to the treasure box effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output sound from becoming difficult to hear.

[Second Embodiment of Characteristic Section 57SH]
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine including the characteristic portion 57SH will be described. The second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine including the characteristic portion 57SH is different from the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine including the characteristic portion 57SH in the aspect of the treasure box effect. Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine including the characteristic portion 57SH will be described focusing on the contents of the treasure box effect.

  An example of the treasure box effect executed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 in the characteristic portion 57SH will be described. 21-7 and 21-8 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the second embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH. 21-7 and 21-8 show display modes of the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub-liquid crystal 57SH51 as the treasure box production progresses, and also the sound output from the speaker 8 (right speaker 8R, left speaker 8L). ..

  21-7 shows an example of the treasure box presentation in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and FIG. 21-8 shows an example of the treasure box 57SH10 in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. The following description will be made assuming that the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-7 is the first treasure box effect and the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-8 is the second treasure box effect. In addition, FIG. 21-9 shows a time chart of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. The first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect will be described with reference to this time chart as well.

  First, an example of the first treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), when the special figure game is being executed, when the first time 57SHT21 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached, the first treasure box effect is started. When the first treasure box effect is started, the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect is performed as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B).

  In the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 as in the first embodiment, and the button image 57SH31B as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B) (see FIG. 21-4 (B)). ) Is not displayed. When the first treasure box effect is started, an appearance sound is output from the left speaker 8L as a front special effect sound. The appearance sound is continuously output while the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect is being performed. The appearance sound is output from the left speaker 8L, thereby causing the player to smell the operation of the push button 31B.

  When the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B between the first time 57SHT21 and the second time 57SHT22, the treasure box 57SH10 is opened and the treasure box 57SH10 is opened, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (C). An image in which the content 57SH11 wrapped in smoke pops out from inside is displayed. When the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened, a sound of “pa-ka” is output from the left speaker 8L, creating an atmosphere in which the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened. Up to this point, the first stage display of the first treasure box effect is displayed. In addition, even when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected by the push sensor 35B and the second time 57SHT22 is reached, the treasure box 57SH10 is finally opened and the latter display of the first treasure box effect is displayed. It should be noted that the operation of the push button 31B may be the second time 57SHT22 without the push sensor 35B detecting the operation, and the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect may not be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed.

  At the second time 57SHT22, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased, and the second stage display of the first treasure box effect is started. When the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect is started, the same effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as a second-stage special effect sound as in the first treasure box effect. This effect sound is continuously output while the latter stage display of the second treasure box effect is being performed.

  In the latter stage display of the second treasure box effect, the content 57SH11 that has popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. Here, as the content 57SH11, the characters "Gekiatsu!" Are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. At this time, the treasure chest 57SH10 has been erased, but may remain displayed. When the character "Geki Atsu!" Is displayed, the sound "Geki Atsu" is output from the left speaker 8L, which enhances the expectation for the execution of SP reach and the jackpot state. Further, while the first treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-7 (B) to (D) is being executed, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed by the decorative characters on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51.

  The execution of the SP reach effect is foretold by displaying the character "Gekiatsu!" On the main liquid crystal 5 as the content 57SH11. After that, when the third time 57SHT23 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached, the first treasure box presentation is ended. When the first treasure box presentation is completed, the reachable design is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R of the main liquid crystal 5, and the reach production is executed. Subsequently, as in the notice of the first treasure box effect, the SP reach is executed as shown in FIG. 21-7 (E). At this time, a decorative character "SP reach" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, and the sound of "confrontation" is output from the speaker 8 (left speaker 8L, right speaker 8R).

  Next, an example of the second treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), when the special drawing game is being executed, when the first time 57SHT21 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached, the second treasure box effect is started. Further, when the 0th time 57SHT20 before the second treasure box effect is started, a precursor sound that is a precursor of the execution of the second treasure box effect is output from the speaker 8 (right speaker 8R, left speaker 8L). .. The precursor sound is continuously output from the 0th time 57SHT20 to the 1st time 57SHT21.

  When the second treasure box effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), the first stage display of the second treasure box effect is performed. In the front display of the second treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. At this time, a button image 57SH31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. The button image 57SH31B is displayed until the operation valid period of the push button 31 elapses or the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B. The operation valid period of the push button 31B is from the first time 57SHT21 to the second time 57SHT22 shown in FIG. 21-9. While the button image 57SH31B is displayed, the time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed below the button image 57SH31B. When the second treasure box effect is started, the appearance sound is output from the right speaker 8R as the front special effect sound. The appearing sound is continuously output while the first-stage display of the second treasure box effect is being performed.

  While the bar of the time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (C), when the player operates the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B, the treasure box 57SH10 Is opened, and an image in which the contents wrapped in smoke pop out from the treasure chest 57SH10 is displayed. When the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened, the right speaker 8R outputs a sound of "pa-kappa", which creates an atmosphere in which the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened. The contents 57SH11 that the treasure box 57SH10 has opened and popped out are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. The process up to this point is the front display of the second treasure box effect. Note that the push button 31B becomes the second time 57SHT22 without being operated, and when the operation valid period elapses, the bar of the time gauge 57SH5TG disappears, the button image 57SH31B and the treasure chest 57SH10 also disappear, and the subsequent display is executed. However, the second treasure box effect ends, but the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed.

  When the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period, when the second time 57SH22 is reached, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased and the second stage display of the second treasure box effect is started. It When the second stage display of the second treasure box effect is started, the same effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as the second stage special effect sound as in the first treasure box effect. This effect sound is continuously output while the latter stage display of the second treasure box effect is being performed.

  In the latter stage display of the second treasure box effect, the content 57SH11 that has popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. Here, the character "CONTINUE" is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 as the content 57SH11. At this time, the treasure chest 57SH10 remains displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, but may be erased. When the character "CONTINUE" is displayed, a sound "CONTINUE?" Is output from the left speaker 8L, which suggests execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The opened treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 while the second treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) to (D) is being executed.

  The execution of the hold change effect is foretold by displaying the character "CONTINUE" on the main liquid crystal 5 as the content 57SH11. Then, the third time 57SHT23 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached, and when the second treasure box presentation is finished, as shown in this notice, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (E), the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R of the main liquid crystal 5 are displayed. As the decorative pattern, the numbers are shifted by one, here the decorative pattern display area 5L is "7", the decorative pattern display area 5R is the number "8" is temporarily stopped, and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5C is variable. The display is continuing. Subsequent to this, the pseudo continuous effect is executed. In the pseudo continuous production, when restarting the variable display of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R from the temporarily stopped state, the sound of "restart" is output from the speaker 8.

  As described above, in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, in the first treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is not displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 within the operation valid period of the push button 31B, and in the second treasure box effect, The button image 57SH31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 within the valid operation period of the push button 31B. Therefore, by changing the mode of the treasure box effect (second treasure box effect) as the notice effect, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the second embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH, the sound output modes executed by the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect are different. Specifically, in the first treasure box production, the appearing sound is output in the front stage display, and the main production sound is output in the second stage display, whereas in the second treasure box, the precursor sound is output before the front stage display is performed. , The appearance sound is output in the front display, and the main effect sound is output in the rear display. For this reason, at the stage where the previous display is performed, the appearance sound is output in both the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, but in the second treasure box effect, the omen sound is output, and the treasure box effect is started. You can get attention to what is done. Therefore, by changing the mode of the treasure box production as the notice production, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Modification of the characteristic part 57SH)
Hereinafter, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic portion 57SH will be described. In the modification of the characteristic part 57SH, a button image (push button) displayed when the treasure box is opened when the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. The display mode of the button image displayed within the operation valid period of 31B may be different. For example, in the first treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A-1), a small button image 57SH31BS smaller than the normal size button image 57SH31B is displayed, and in the second treasure box effect, FIG. As shown in 10 (B), a large button image 57SH31BB larger than the button image 57SH31B may be displayed. Further, a button image 57SH31B of a normal size may be displayed in the first treasure box effect, a large button image 57SH31BB may be displayed in the second treasure box effect, and a small button image may be displayed in the first treasure box effect. 57SH31BS may be displayed, and the button image 57SH31B having a normal size may be displayed in the second treasure box effect.

  Further, the character may be displayed together with the button image. For example, in the first treasure box effect, a normal button image 57SH31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A-2), and in the second treasure box effect as shown in FIG. 21-10 (B-2). The character 57SHC may be displayed on the normal button image 57SH31B. In the first treasure box effect, a character may be displayed on the button image 57SH31B, and in the second treasure box effect, a character different from the first treasure box effect may be displayed on the button image 57SH31B. ..

  In addition, when the button image is displayed, the operation mode of the push button may be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. For example, in the first treasure box effect, an image urging the push button 31B to be pressed for a long time may be displayed, and in the second treasure box effect, an image urging the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit may be displayed. Then, in the first treasure box effect, the push button 31B is pressed and held for a predetermined time, for example, 4 seconds to display an image that the treasure box 57SH10 opens. In the second treasure box effect, the push button 31B is pressed a predetermined number of times, for example, 20 seconds. An image that the treasure chest 57SH10 opens by being repeatedly hit may be displayed.

  Further, the lighting / blinking state of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed together with the display of the button image. For example, in the first treasure box effect, during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A-1), the game effect lamp 9 is blinked, but the button image is not displayed, and the second image is displayed. In the treasure box production, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B-1), the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on and the button image 57SH31B may be displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. 21-11 (A-1) (B-1), the blinking state of the game effect lamp 9 shown in FIG. 1 is schematically shown.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21-11 (A-2) and (B-2), when the electric decoration 57SH30 is provided on the surface of the gaming machine frame 3, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect are produced. The lighting state (the flow of light) of the illumination body 57SH40 may be different between the above. This illumination body 57SH40 is configured to include an illumination body upper portion 57SH40A and an illumination body lower portion 40B, and the illumination body upper portion 57SH40A is located above the upper end side of the upper plate 57SH41, and the illumination body The lower body 57SH40B is located below the upper end side of the upper plate 57SH41. The lower portion of the illumination body 57SH40B has a shape gathering toward the center as it goes downward, and the lower end portion of the lower portion 57SH40B of the illumination body is connected to the lower end portion of the stick controller 31A.

  When such an electric body 57SH40 is provided, in the first treasure box effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A-2), the electric body upper portion 57SH40A in the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Blinks entirely, suggesting the operation of the push button 31B to the player. Further, in the second treasure box production, during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B-2), the light blinking at the upper portion 57SH40A of the decorative body descends to the lower portion 57SH40B of the decorative body, It is also possible to illuminate the push button 31B provided above the stick controller 31A at the lower end portion (center portion) of the lower portion 57SH40B of the illumination body. The light flowing down the illumination body lower portion 57SH40B illuminates the push button 31B, thereby urging the player to operate the push button 31B. In this way, the lighting state (the flow of light) of the illumination body 57SH40 may be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  Further, the sound output from the speaker 8 may be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A-1), in the first treasure box presentation, the first appearance sound is output from the left speaker 8L in the preceding display, and as shown in FIG. 21-12 (B-1). In the second treasure box presentation, the second appearance sound may be output from the right speaker 8R in the previous display. Further, the main effect sound output in the second-stage display may be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, or the appearance sound and the main effect sound output in both the first-stage display and the second-stage display may be changed to the first mode. The 1st treasure box effect and the 2nd treasure box effect may be different.

  Further, when the output sound (appearance sound, main effect sound, etc.) differs between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, an example in which the output sound mode is different is the length of the sound. The pitch of the pod and the volume of the volume may be different. Alternatively, one treasure box effect may output a mechanical sound, and the other treasure box effect may output a sound like words, or the number of speakers to be output may be different, for example, The sound may be output from a plurality of speakers in one treasure box effect, and the sound may be output from a single speaker in the other treasure box effect. Furthermore, when vibrating the push button 31B or the like in both the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, there may be a case where a vibrating sound is emitted and a case where it is not emitted.

  In the above embodiment, the sound related to the first treasure box effect and the front display of the second treasure box effect are output from the left speaker 8L, and the sound related to the second display of the second treasure box effect is output from the right speaker 8R. May be output in the form of For example, the sound related to the first treasure box effect may be output from the right speaker 8R, or the sound related to the second treasure box effect may be all output from the left speaker 8L. Further, all sounds related to the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect may be output from one of the right speaker 8R and the left speaker 8L, or may be output from both the right speaker 8R and the left speaker 8L.

  Further, the vibration state of the push button 31B may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A-2), in the first treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is displayed and the push button 31B is displayed until the push button 31B is operated in the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 21-12 (B-2), in the second treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is displayed and pushed until the push button 31B is operated in the operation valid period. Although the button 31B is vibrated, the push button 31B may not be vibrated. Further, the first treasure box effect, the second treasure box effect, and the second vibration mode may be different. For example, in the first treasure box effect, the push button 31B may be continuously vibrated, and in the second treasure box effect, the push button 31B may be intermittently vibrated.

The operation target may be a device other than the push button, for example, the stick controller 31A. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 -13 (A-1), the first treasure box effect, to display the controller image 57SH31A imitating the stick controller 31A to the operating lifetime, the operation of the stick controller 31A Controller sensor unit 35A is upon detecting, displaying the image to open the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIG. 21 -13 (B-1), the second treasure box effect, to display the button image 57SH31B the operating lifetime, the push button 31B An image that opens the treasure chest 57SH10 may be displayed when the push sensor 35B detects an operation. In this case, the displayed image may or may not correspond to the operated device. For example, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects the operation of the stick controller 31A while the button image 57SH31B is displayed, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed, or the controller image 57SH31A is displayed. If the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B while the player is on the screen, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an automatic button or an automatic continuous hitting function. The "auto button" is a function for executing the process assuming that the push button 31B is not actually operated by the player but the button or the like is operated. That is, when the function of the auto button is set to be valid, the process is executed assuming that the push button 31B is pressed even if the push button 31B is not operated, and the treasure box effect is executed.

  Further, “automatic continuous hit” actually means that the push button 31B is continuously operated (for example, long press) by the player, but the push button 31B is continuously operated a plurality of times continuously (for example, push). This is a function of detecting that the button 31B has been repeatedly hit. That is, when the automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, even if the push button 31B is not operated a plurality of times in succession, the processing is executed assuming that the button or the like is continuously hit, and the advance notice display indicate. The automatic continuous hitting function may be started at the time when the long pressing of the push button 31B is started, or may be started after a certain time, for example, 4 seconds has elapsed from the time when the long pressing was started.

  The functions of the automatic button and the automatic continuous hit may be realized by operating the stick controller 31A instead of operating the push button 31B. In the case of the stick controller 31A, long-pulling may be executed in response to long pressing of the push button 31B, and continuous pulling operation may be executed in response to continuous hitting of the push button 31B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may always be provided with the function of the automatic button and the automatic continuous hitting, or the player can set it from a dedicated screen at a predetermined timing, for example, when variable display is not performed. Good. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with both the auto button and the auto continuous hit function, or only one of them may be provided.

  For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set the function of the automatic button, an automatic button display indicating that the function of the automatic button is set may be provided. As a display indicating that the auto button function is set, for example, when the auto button function is not set, the auto button function is set as shown in FIG. 21-13 (A-2). 21-13 (A-3), the function of the auto button is set in the upper right corner of the main liquid crystal 5 when the display indicating that the auto button is set is not displayed. The automatic display 57SH5AS indicating that the current state is displayed is displayed. The auto button display may be performed at any time, for example, when the function of the auto button is set, the display may be started so that it is always displayed, or the operation of the push button 31B is performed by the push sensor 35B. May be displayed when is detected. Further, the operation of the push button 31B may be displayed when the push sensor 35B cannot detect it.

  It should be noted that any display indicating that the function of the auto button is set may be performed. For example, the automatic during-display 57SH5AS on the main liquid crystal 5 may be displayed at any position on the main liquid crystal 5. However, it may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. Further, an auto button setting lamp or the like indicating that the function of the auto button is set may be provided, and the auto button setting lamp may be turned on when the function of the auto button is set.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set the automatic continuous hit function, it can be displayed that the automatic continuous hit function is set similarly to the display of the setting of the automatic button function when the automatic button can be set. You may do it. Also, if both automatic button continuous hitting can be set, the display indicating that the automatic continuous button hitting function is set and the display indicating that the automatic continuous button hitting function is set are displayed so that they can be distinguished. Good.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has, for example, an auto button function, for example, when the auto button function is set in the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, whether or not the auto button function works. However, the modes may be different. For example, in the first treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is not displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 during the operation valid period, and in the second treasure box effect when the button image 57SH31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal during the operation valid period, the first treasure box effect. Then, the function of the auto button does not work during the operation valid period, and in the second treasure box effect, the function of the auto button may work during the operation valid period. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with, for example, an automatic continuous hitting function, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect may have different modes of whether or not the automatic continuous hitting function works.

  Further, as the push button, a protruding push button that can be in a protruding state or a non-projecting state may be used. The protruding push button is, for example, normally in a non-protruding state, and in a part or all of the time when the push sensor can detect the operation of the push button, the protruding push button protrudes from the non-protruding state to the protruding state. Further, the push sensor that detects the operation of the protruding push button detects the operation of the player when the protruding push button is pushed to some extent, like the push button 31B, when the protruding push button is in the non-protruding state, When the protruding push button is in the protruding state, the player's operation is detected when the protruding push button is pushed halfway from the protruding state. When such a protruding push button is provided, when the protruding push button is in the protruding state, the main liquid crystal 5 displays a protruding button image simulating the protruding push button in the protruding state. You can

  When the projecting push button is provided, for example, in the first treasure box effect, the projecting push button is set to the non-projecting state in the operation valid period, the same button image as the button image 57SH31B is displayed, and the projecting push button is operated. When the push sensor detects, the image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed, and in the second treasure box effect, the protruding push button is set to the protruding state, and the protruding button image is displayed during the operation effective period. An image for opening the treasure chest 57SH10 may be displayed when the push sensor detects an operation.

  Further, when the protruding push button is operated, the protruding button image may be operated to display the image in which the protruding button image is pressed. For example, a movable accessory that moves up and down in front of the main liquid crystal 5 may be provided, and the movable accessory may be moved downward to press the protruding button image, and an image in which the protruding button image is pressed may be displayed. Alternatively, the character or the like may be displayed on the protruding button image, or the character or the like may kick the protruding button image from above to act on the protruding button image and display the image in which the protruding button image is pushed. These display modes may be appropriately selected and displayed so as to be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  Further, instead of the sensor that detects the operation of the player such as the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, a sensor that detects the operation of the player may be provided. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the hand held by the player on the surface of the gaming machine frame 3 or a sensor that detects how the player moves the hand. An image sensor, a distance sensor, an optical sensor, or the like may be used as these sensors.

  Further, in the above-mentioned treasure box effect, although the latter display is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in both the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, the latter display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. For example, in the first treasure box effect, the front display may be performed on the main liquid crystal 5 and the rear display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. In the second treasure box effect, the front display and the rear display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. You may do so. In short, the first treasure box effect may be performed only by the main liquid crystal 5, the second treasure box effect may be performed only by the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, or the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect may be performed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. May be done in both.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and modified example, the button display and the like in the first treasure box effect and the button display and the like in the second treasure box effect performed during the operation valid period may be interchanged with each other. Alternatively, the button display, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, the lighting state of the electric decoration 57SH40, and the like may be appropriately combined and executed.

  Further, in the treasure box effect of the above embodiment, the content jumping out of the treasure box is a character, but may be something other than a character, for example, food, a mark, a character, a design, or the like, or a character or a character other than these. It may be one or a combination of other than characters. When the content is a mark, it may be a mark that evokes a suggested (preliminary) effect, or when the content is a character, it may be a character corresponding to the suggested (previous) effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the treasure box effect is performed once in one variable display and the treasure box effect is not performed twice or more in one variable display, but the treasure box effect is twice in one variable display. The above may be performed. For example, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, respectively, and the contents 57SH11 popped out from the treasure box 57SH10 displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 give an advance notice (indication) of a pseudo-reproduction, etc., and are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. The content 57SH11 that has popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 may suggest (preliminary) a pre-reading notice effect or the like. In this case, the contents 57SH11 may be displayed at the same time or may be displayed at different timings. Further, the contents 57SH11 may be displayed together on the main liquid crystal 5, the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, or may be separately displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 51.

  Further, in the embodiment of the characteristic part 57SH, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game is performed by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by using the gaming value, for example. One game ends when a variable display result is derived to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be started, and the variable display result derived to the image display device It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated according to.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 57SH and the characteristic part 31AK)
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the characteristic portion 31AK, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs, for example, a title notification for notifying a title corresponding to the reach effect, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the characteristic portion 57SH and the characteristic portion 31AK. For example, a notice (indication) of reach production may be given.

  Further, in each of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, a notice (recommendation) of the reach effect is given. In the first treasure box effect, the reach effect via the title notification is announced (indication), and in the second treasure box effect. Alternatively, it may be possible to give advance notice (indication) of a reach effect that does not go through the title notification. Further, the appearance sound and the main effect sound may be different depending on whether the title notification is performed or not.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 57SH and the characteristic part 109SG)
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the characteristic portion 109SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set three-stage set values of, for example, "1" to "3", and the smaller (lower) the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability ( The winning rate) etc. will be high. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the characteristic portion 57SH and the characteristic portion 109SG, for example, the set value may be suggested or notified by the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  For example, the smaller the set value, the easier it is to execute the second treasure box effect rather than the first treasure box effect. In this case, when the first treasure box effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the set value is small (ball output rate is high). Alternatively, the appearance rate of the first treasure box effect may be higher when the set value is even than when it is odd. Further, in a specific treasure box effect, for example, the first treasure box effect on the first day of business day (so-called morning 1), the effect suggesting the set value may be performed.

  Further, in the first treasure box effect, the smaller the set value is, the easier it is to determine the big hit notification effect. Further, the ratio of the payout rate determining factor may differ depending on the set value, and the execution ratio of the second treasure box effect may be different from that of the first treasure box effect depending on whether the payout rate determining factor is high or low. The winning rate determining factor may be, for example, a big hit probability, a small hit probability, a probability variation plunge rate, a probability variation continuation rate, or the like. Probability variation inrush rate refers to, for example, the proportion of probability variation jackpots in the whole big hit (normal big hit and probability variation big hit) in the low probability state. It refers to the proportion.

  Further, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is three stages of "1" to "3", but the number of stages may be two stages or four or more stages, for example, six stages of "1" to "6". Good. Further, the smaller the set value, the higher the jackpot probability (ball-out rate), but the larger the set value, the higher the jackpot probability (ball-out rate) may be.

(Additional notes regarding the characteristic part 57SH)
(11) A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a first display unit (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) capable of displaying a game and a second display unit (for example, a main display 5 or the like) that is harder to recognize than the first display unit. A sub-liquid crystal 57SH51 etc.), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.),
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that controls the first display unit and the second display unit to display a game.
A detection means for detecting the movement of the player (for example, a push sensor 35B for detecting the movement of the push button 31B),
The display control means,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect that displays the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after performing the display of the treasure box 57SH10) after performing the first step display,
As the specific effect,
In the first display means, after performing the first front-stage display which is the front-stage display, the rear-stage display is displayed, and the second-stage display is displayed after the first front-stage display which is the front-stage display is performed in the first display means. 1 specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), after displaying the treasure chest 57SH10 on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIGS. 21-4 (C) and (D), the treasure chest 57SH10 is displayed. A first treasure box effect that displays the contents 57SH11 that are released and come out of the treasure box 57SH10),
A second specific effect of displaying the second-stage display after performing the second front-stage display which is the front-stage display on the second display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), in the sub-liquid crystal 57SH51, After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10, and the like. Is feasible,
In the first specific effect, the latter display is displayed based on the detection of the detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), after displaying the treasure chest 57SH10 on the main liquid crystal 5, When the push button 31B is operated by the player and the push sensor 35B detects the operation (operation) of the player, the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened and the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened as shown in FIGS. Display the contents 57SH11 coming out of 57SH10, etc.),
In the second specific effect, the latter-stage display is displayed even when the detection means has not detected the display (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the treasure chest 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51). After that, even when the push button 31B is not operated by the player and the push sensor 35B does not detect the operation (operation) of the player, the treasure box 57SH10 is not opened as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D). A second treasure box effect that displays the contents 57SH11 that are released and come out of the treasure box 57SH10).

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the aspect of the effect.

(12) A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a first display unit (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) capable of displaying a game and a second display unit (for example, a main display 5 or the like) that is harder to recognize than the first display unit. A sub-liquid crystal 57SH51 etc.), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.),
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that controls the first display unit and the second display unit to display a game.
A detection means for detecting the movement of the player (for example, a push sensor 35B for detecting the movement of the push button 31B),
The display control means,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect that displays the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after performing the display of the treasure box 57SH10) after performing the first step display,
As the specific effect,
A first specific effect for displaying the latter-stage display after performing the first former-stage display which is the former-stage display on the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), in the main liquid crystal 5, After the treasure chest 57SH10 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 21-4 (C) and (D), the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened and the first treasure chest effect that displays the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10),
A second specific effect of displaying the second-stage display after performing the second front-stage display which is the front-stage display on the second display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), in the sub-liquid crystal 57SH51, After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10, and the like. Is feasible,
In the first specific effect, the instruction display for instructing the operation is not performed when the operation of the player is received (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B) and FIG. 21-9, the operation of the first treasure box effect). Within the effective period, the button image 57SH31B imitating the push button 31B is not displayed on the main liquid crystal 5),
In the second specific effect, an instruction display for instructing the operation is performed when the operation of the player is accepted (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B) and FIG. 21-9, the operation of the second treasure box effect is effective). The button image 57SH31B imitating the push button 31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 within the period).

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the aspect of the effect.

(13) A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention includes a first display means (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) that is harder to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal 57SH51 etc.), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.),
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that controls the first display unit and the second display unit to display a game.
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting sounds related to games,
A sound control means (for example, a voice control board 13) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means,
The display control means,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect that displays the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after performing the display of the treasure box 57SH10) after performing the first step display,
As the specific effect,
A first specific effect for displaying the latter-stage display after performing the first former-stage display which is the former-stage display on the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), in the main liquid crystal 5, After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10, the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10 are displayed as shown in FIGS.
A second specific effect for displaying the second-stage display after performing the second front-stage display which is the front-stage display on the second display means (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 21-5 (B), the sub-image display device 57SH51). 21. After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10, the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D). Is possible,
The sound control means,
When the first specific effect is executed, no specific sound is output in the first front effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the image display device 5). Do not output the appearance from the speakers 8L and 8R while going),
When the second specific effect is executed, a specific sound is output in the second front effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the image display device 5). The appearance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the operation).

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the aspect of the effect.

(14) A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a first display means (for example, a main liquid crystal 5 or the like) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, a main display 5 or the like) that is harder to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal 57SH51 etc.), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.),
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that controls the first display unit and the second display unit to display a game.
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting sounds related to games,
A sound control means (for example, a voice control board 13) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means,
The display control means,
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect that displays the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after performing the display of the treasure box 57SH10) after performing the first step display,
As the specific effect,
A first specific effect for displaying the latter-stage display after performing the first former-stage display which is the former-stage display on the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), in the main liquid crystal 5, After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10, the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10 are displayed as shown in FIGS.
A second specific effect of displaying the second-stage display after performing the second front-stage display which is the front-stage display on the second display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), in the sub-liquid crystal 57SH51, After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10, the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10 as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D). Yes,
The sound control means,
The sound output mode is made different between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), the main liquid crystal 5 has a treasure box). When 57SH10 is displayed, the precursor sound is not output as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), and when the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), a predictive sound is output).

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the aspect of the effect.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (14), the display control means does not simultaneously execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, displayed on the main liquid crystal 5). The treasure chest 57SH10 and the treasure chest 57SH10 displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 may not be executed in one variable display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15), the display control means executes the specific effect on the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)). After displaying the treasure chest 57SH10 on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the main liquid crystal 5 has the treasure chest 57SH10 opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure chest 57SH10. May be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, the player can easily recognize the effect result, and thus the interest can be improved.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (16), the specific effect is a notice effect that suggests an effect other than the specific effect (for example, a reach effect as shown in FIG. 21-4). Suggested treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5, treasure box effect that suggests a change in the hold display displayed in the hold display area 57SH52, as shown in FIG. 21-8, decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative pattern displayed in FIG. 2 may be a treasure box effect for announcing a pseudo-relation effect in which it appears to make a plurality of changes with one change).

  According to the above configuration, variations that are suggested with respect to effects other than the specific effect are increased, so that the interest can be improved.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (17), the display control means notifies an operation instruction for instructing an operation in the first specific effect (for example, the push button 31B is displayed in a small size, 21-10 (A-1) shows the small button image 57SH31BS indicating the operation instruction and the like, and the operation instruction indicating the operation in the second specific effect (for example, the push button 31B is displayed in a large size, 21-10 (A-2) and the like (notifying the operation instruction that displayed the large button image 57SH31BB) (for example, the small button image 57SH31BS is different from the large button image 57SH31BB). .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening Switch 23 Count switch 30 Hit ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising a first display means capable of displaying a game and a second display means which is more difficult to recognize than the first display means, and which can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a first specific effect and a second specific effect as a specific effect for displaying the latter step after performing the first step display ,
Sound output means capable of outputting sounds related to games,
Sound control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
In the first specific effect, after displaying the first front stage display, a notice image is displayed as a rear stage display,
In the second specific effect, after displaying the second front display, a notice image is displayed as a rear display,
It is possible to display a common character in the first front display and the second front display,
The sound control means outputs a specific sound when performing the second front-stage display, but does not output the specific sound when performing the first front-stage display,
A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed . A gaming machine comprising a first display means capable of displaying a game and a second display means which is more difficult to recognize than the first display means, and which can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a first specific effect and a second specific effect as a specific effect for displaying the latter step after performing the first step display ,
Sound output means capable of outputting sounds related to games,
Sound control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
In the first specific effect, after displaying the first front stage display, a notice image is displayed as a rear stage display,
In the second specific effect, after displaying the second front display, a notice image is displayed as a rear display,
It is possible to display a common character in the first front display and the second front display,
The sound control means changes a sound output mode when performing the second front-stage display and when performing the first front-stage display,
A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed .

Images